DelMarValicious Dishes

  • All Recipes
  • Subscribe
  • About
  • Contact Me
Delmarvalicious Dishes » Recipes » Page 2

Recipes

Enjoy my latest and greatest recipes! Here you can find everything I have created and search by category. Whether you are planning a beautiful brunch or just looking for something new to cook for dinner, I have a wide variety of ideas for you. Bon Appetit!

Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Soup Mix)

October 18, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

Bowl of Onion Soup Beef Stew with green beans, carrots and potatoes

Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Mix) is an easy beef stew recipe made using a secret ingredient: onion soup mix! This is the best beef stew because it is  a complete meal made in a crockpot. Perfect for any night of the week! 

Bowl of Onion Soup Beef Stew with green beans, carrots and potatoes

Cool weather means that the cozy meals and slow cooking are the only way to cook. This delicious Beef Stew recipe is simple to make, full of flavor and will feed the whole family! 

Looking for other great meal ideas to keep you full and warm? Try this 5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti for a cozy, comfort food with minimal prep time and loads of flavor! Looking for more slow cooker recipes? Try this Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili! This chili can be made using ground beef, ground turkey or ground venison and is cooked in the crockpot for the ultimate comfort food! 

Jump to:
  • Classic Beef Stew Details 
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Mix)

Classic Beef Stew Details 

Flavor: Savory! This hearty beef stew recipe has flavors of caramelized onions over top of tender beef stew meat. 

Time: 20 minutes to prep this meal and 2-6 hours in the slow cooker depending on the temperature.

Level of Difficulty: This stew is very simple to make! While it is not a classic ‘dump’ crock pot recipe, it does not take much to get this aromatic and flavorful meal on the table! 

Ingredients

Although the ingredients list is long, most ingredients are pantry staples!

Beef Stew Ingredients are shown including butter, garlic, onion, potatoes, frozen vegetables, Lipton Onion Soup Mix, flour, salt and pepper.
  • Stew Meat: You can buy beef stew meat already chopped into 1-inch cubes. Or, purchase a chuck roast, bone-in short rib or even a round steak and dice into 1-inch cubes for the stew. 
  • Salt and Pepper
  • Vegetable Oil
  • Flour
  • Yellow Onion
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Onion Soup Mix: I like to use Lipton Onion Soup Mix. Here is the one I use!
  • Water
  • Frozen Soup Vegetables: I like to use a bag of frozen vegetables that includes peas, green beans, carrots and lima beans. You could also use fresh vegetables such as baby carrots, 
  • Yukon Gold Baby Potatoes: Diced into halves or quarters.
  • Corn Starch
  • Unsalted Butter
  • Red Wine: Substitute beef broth or sweet vermouth.

Instructions

  1. Begin by bringing the stew meat to room temperature. Using a paper towel, blot off any extra moisture. Season meat with salt and pepper. Toss meat with flour
  2. Heat vegetable oil in a thick bottom pan over medium-high heat. Once oil is hot, add stew meat to pan. Sear sides of the beef for 45 seconds. Do this in batches as to not overcrowd the pan. 
  3. Add beef to crock pot once seared. 
  4. Cook onions in the same pot stirring occasionally until soft about 5 minutes. Add in garlic cloves and stir. Add red wine to loosen any brown bits from the bottom of the pan. Add onions and garlic to the crockpot. 
  5. To the crockpot, add frozen soup vegetables, baby potatoes, water and onion soup mix. Stir together.
  6. Cook on high for 2-4 hours or on low for 6-8 hours. 
  7. Mix together remaining 1/4 cup of water and cornstarch in a small bowl. Add to the slow cooker and stir to thicken.
  8. Stir in butter until it melts. 
  9. Serve over egg noodles, with crusty bread or over mashed potatoes. 
Stew meat tossed with flour, salt and pepper

Begin by tossing stew meat with salt, pepper and flour.

Seared beef stew meat prior to going into the slow cooker

Using a thick bottom pan or Dutch oven, sear meat for 45 seconds on each side. Transfer to slow cooker.

White onions and garlic after cooked with red wine on the stove

Cook onions and garlic in the same pan as the beef. Deglaze pan using red wine.

Classic Beef Stew ingredients stirred with Lipton Onion Soup Mix and water in a slow cooker

Add onions and garlic, potatoes and frozen soup vegetables to crockpot. Sprinkle with Onion Soup mix and Water. Mix together. Cook on low for 6-8 hours or on low for 3-4 hours.

Whisking cornstarch and water to thicken stew

Whisk together cornstarch and 1/4 cup water. Keeping the heat on, stir into the slow cooker.

Stirring butter into cooked beef stew in slow cooker pot

Add butter and stir until butter melts. Enjoy!

Variations

  • Add fresh herbs such as thyme and rosemary for more flavor!
  • Add in zesty diced tomatoes and tomato paste for a different flavor. 
  • Add extra garlic, potatoes or carrots to adapt to your families favorites.  

Equipment

  • Large Dutch Oven or Thick Bottom Pan
  • Paper towel
  • Slow Cooker
  • Measuring Cups and Liquid Measuring Cup 
  • Small Bowl 

Storage

Store any leftover Slow Cooker Beef Stew refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days. Many people agree that stew tastes better the day after it is cooked because the flavors have time to meld together. This stew also freezes great! Freeze in an airtight container for up to 3 months. Dethaw stew in the refrigerator and reheat in a pot over low heat. 

Close up shot of classic beef stew showing all of the delicious vegetables including potatoes, carrots and peas with the stew meat

Top tip

After you add the onion soup mix to the slow cooker, be sure to really stir together all ingredients to make sure that the soup mix mixes with the water and is distributed to all ingredients. 

FAQ

Why is my stew meat tough when cooked in a slow cooker?

Stew meat can become tough when cooked in a slow cooker if there is not enough water in the pot. Make sure that water is covering all of the meat before turning on the slow cooker. If you need to add a little water, add it and stir to mix the dip mix, vegetables and beef. Stew meat should become tender as it cooks. 

What is onion soup mix?

Onion soup mix contains onions, onion powder, salt, soy sauce, high oleic sunflower oil and other preservatives. 

How can I add more flavor to my beef stew?

Add more flavor to your beef stew by adding savory herbs such as rosemary or thyme when cooking. You can also add diced tomatoes or stewed tomatoes to the crockpot. 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A tray of 5 ingredient meatless baked ziti, a Kraft copycat recipe
    5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe)
  • Bowls of Carrot Sweet Potato Soup topped with coconut milk
    Carrot Sweet Potato Soup
  • Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice
    Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)
  • Plate of roasted fish with garlic cherry tomatoes served over pasta with basil garnish
    One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with beef stew:

  • Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam
    Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam
  • Pineapple Baked Beans in a bowl with corn bread and pan of baked beans
    Pineapple Baked Beans (Using Black Beans)
  • Smokey Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, onions, cilantro and chips
    Smoky Mexican Bean Dip (Skillet Dip)
  • Herby Lemon Orzo Pasta Salad with feta, peppers and eggplant
    Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables
Bowl of Onion Soup Beef Stew with green beans, carrots and potatoes
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Mix)

Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Mix) is an easy beef stew recipe made using a secret ingredient: onion soup mix! This is the best beef stew because it is  a complete meal made in a crockpot. Perfect for any night of the week! 
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time3 hours hrs
Total Time3 hours hrs 10 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 368kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large Dutch Oven or Thick Bottom Pan
  • Paper Towel
  • Slow Cooker
  • Small Bowls
  • Measuring Cups

Ingredients

  • 1 1/2 lbs Beef Stew Meat
  • Salt and Pepper
  • 2 tbsp Vegetable Oil
  • 2 tbsp Flour
  • 1 Yellow Onion Diced
  • 3 Garlic Cloves Minced
  • 1 Envelope Onion Soup Mix
  • 2 1/4 cups Water Divided
  • 2 cups Frozen Soup Vegetables
  • 1 lb Baby Yukon Gold Potatoes Halved or Diced
  • 3 tbsp Corn Starch
  • 2 tbsp Unsalted Butter
  • 1/2 cup Red Wine Optional (used to deglaze pan)

Instructions

  • Bring stew meat to room temperature. Using a paper towel, remove any extra moisture. Season with salt and pepper. Toss in flour.
  • Heat pan over medium high heat. Once oil is hot, add stew meat and sear for 45 seconds. Sear meat in batches as to not overcrowd the pan. Add seared meat to crockpot.
  • Turn heat down to medium. Add onion and cook for 5 minutes until soft. Add garlic, stirring constantly for 1 minute. Add a splash of red wine if needed to loosen bits from bottom of pan.
  • Add onion and garlic to crockpot. Add frozen soup vegetables and potatoes. Pour 2 cups water into crockpot. Sprinkle with onion soup mix. Stir to combine.
  • Cook on low for 6-8 hours or on high for 3- 4 hours.
  • Add remaining 1/4 cup water and cornstarch to a small bowl. Stir to combine.
  • Turn heat to high on crockpot. Add cornstarch mixture and stir to thicken.
  • Add butter and stir to combine.
  • Serve hot with bread, over egg noodles or over mashed potatoes.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 368kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 118mg | Potassium: 877mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3.199IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 4mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Winter Recipes

Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn (using Taco Seasoning)

October 13, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Mexican Popcorn with Taco Seasoning for a Cinco de Mayo Party!

Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn (using Taco Seasoning) is the best taco popcorn recipe for your next movie night or Cinco de Mayo party! This recipe makes a big batch of popcorn for a perfect low calorie snack. 

Mexican Popcorn with Taco Seasoning for a Cinco de Mayo Party!

Popcorn is one of my favorite snacks and learning how simple popcorn is to make at home has been a game changer! 

This Mexican Popcorn Recipe was inspired by my other popcorn recipes. If you are looking for a unique popcorn try this Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning. For a kick of heat, try this Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese!

Jump to:
  • Mexican Popcorn Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to Make Mexican Popcorn
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn (using Taco Seasoning)

Mexican Popcorn Details

Flavor: Think about eating a taco in popcorn form! This popcorn has traditional taco flavoring such as paprika, chili powder and garlic along with salty cotija cheese and zesty lime. 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! Once you learn how to make popcorn at home, you won’t stop!

Time: This popcorn comes together in less than 10 minutes. 

Ingredients

Mexican Popcorn Ingredients: popcorn kernels, lime zest, cotija cheese, taco seasoning, butter, nutritional yeast and vegetable oil
  • Popcorn Kernels
  • Vegetable Oil: Could also use coconut oil or peanut oil.
  • Taco Seasoning: I like to use low sodium.
  • Lime Zest: Don’t skip this!
  • Cotija Cheese: Could substitute another salty cheese such as Pecorino or Romano Cheese.
  • ​Unsalted Butter
  • Nutritional Yeast: This is a dairy-free vegan seasoning. It gives popcorn a nutty and cheesy flavor. You can omit the nutritional yeast but I recommend using it. It is a game changer! 

How to Make Mexican Popcorn

  1. Start by mixing together the lime zest and cotija cheese in a small bowl. 
  2. Add oil of choice to a medium pot with popcorn kernels over medium heat. Place a lid on the pot.
  3. Wait until you hear the kernels pop. Stay close by as the popcorn begins to pop. Once there are more than two seconds between the remaining kernels, the popcorn is cooked. Remove from heat. 
  4. Pour melted butter over popcorn. Stir in lime zest, cotija cheese, taco seasoning and nutritional yeast. 
  5. Enjoy popcorn! 
Popcorn kernels in a pot ready to pop

Add oil and popcorn kernels to a medium pot over medium hot.

Fresh stovetop popcorn hot off of the stove

Pop popcorn until there is 2 seconds between pops. Remove from stove.

Cooked popcorn with taco seasoning, lime zest, cotija cheese, nutritional yeast and melted butter poured over top of kernels

Pour melted butter, lime zest, taco seasoning, cotija cheese and nutritional yeast over top of popped popcorn.

Popcorn in a large bowl with all ingredients mixed through to make a large batch of Mexican Popcorn!

Stir ingredients together to coat kernels and enjoy!

Variations

Popcorn is such a simple food to make to your taste. Try one of these fun variations or make your own!

  • Make it spicy by adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or adding jalapenos! Use this recipe to learn how to cook jalapenos for popcorn! 
  • Control the sodium! Make your own taco seasoning so that you can control the salt level as well as the flavor! Here is a great recipe for homemade taco seasoning!
  • Make it sweet! Sweet and salty pair perfectly together. Add a teaspoon of sugar to the popcorn for a sweet and salty Mexican popcorn! 

Equipment

No fancy popcorn maker is required to make this popcorn! 

  • Stovetop
  • Medium to Large Pot: I like to use a medium pot with high sides. 
  • Zester
  • Small Bowls: To mix the cheese and lime zest and to melt the butter. 
  • Spoon to stir popcorn with spice mixture.

Storage

Popcorn is best enjoyed right after popping. The humidity can cause popcorn to quickly become stale. I recommend storing popcorn in a cool place in a sealed bag. 

A bowl of Mexican Popcorn sprinkled with lime zest and cotija cheese with extra taco seasoning on the side

Top tip

Don’t skip the nutritional yeast! I have made this popcorn with the yeast and without the yeast! Even a little bit of the yeast makes the biggest difference! 

FAQ

What is Mexican Street Corn Popcorn?

 ​Mexican Street Corn Popcorn is popcorn that is reminiscent of traditional Mexican Street Corn. This popcorn recipe has a similar taste to street corn with flavors from the cotija cheese, fresh lime zest and taco seasoning. 

What can I add to popcorn for more flavor?

To add more flavor to popcorn, I recommend adding a little of your favorite seasoning. A little seasoning goes a long way on popcorn. For this Mexican Popcorn, I recommend adding the nutritional yeast for more flavor. The nutritional yeast gives the popcorn a cheesy and nutty flavor that makes it irresistible! 

Can I use pre-made bagged popcorn or microwave popcorn to make Mexican Popcorn?

Yes, you can use bagged popcorn or microwave popcorn to make this Mexican Popcorn recipe! Simply, add the popcorn to a large bowl and mix together the remaining ingredients. Keep in mind, pre-made popcorn or microwave popcorn can have added salt and the taste may slightly differ. 

Related

Looking for other fun snack recipes like this? Try these:

  • A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
    Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)
  • A delicious bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese. The perfect movie night snack!
    Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese
  • Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers covered in sauce with celery and ranch sauce
    Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers
  • Reaching for a bite of salty and tangy Dill Pickle Popcorn
    Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with popcorn:

  • A tray of 5 ingredient meatless baked ziti, a Kraft copycat recipe
    5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe)
  • Three bowls of Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili (Crockpot Recipe). Bowls are topped with shredded cheese, sour cream and jalapenos.
    Award Winning Venison Chili (Easy Crockpot Recipe)
  • A plate full of Honey Old Bay Wings served with the homemade honey old bay sauce and ranch dressing.
    Crispy Honey Old Bay Wings (Oven Baked)
  • Gluten Free Chicken Salad on Lettuce Wraps with Red Grapes
    Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free)
Mexican Popcorn with Taco Seasoning for a Cinco de Mayo Party!
Print Recipe

Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn (using Taco Seasoning)

Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn (using Taco Seasoning) is the best taco popcorn recipe for your next movie night or Cinco de Mayo party! This recipe makes a big batch of popcorn for a perfect low calorie snack. 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 226kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Stovetop
  • Medium to Large Pot with lid
  • Small Bowls
  • Spoon
  • Zester

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp Oil of Choice Vegetable, Coconut or Peanut Oil
  • 1/2 cup Popcorn Kernels
  • 1/4 cup Cotija Cheese Grated
  • Zest of a Lime
  • 2 tsp Taco Seasoning
  • 2 tbsp Unsalted Butter Melted
  • 2 tbsp Nutritional Yeast

Instructions

  • Mix together cotija cheese and lime zest in a small bowl.
  • Add oil to a medium sized pot. Add popcorn kernels and place lid on pot. Allow kernels to pop, occasionally shaking the pot. Once kernels stop popping for 2 seconds in between pops, remove popcorn from heat.
  • Pour melted butter on top of popcorn. Stir to coat.
  • Stir in cotija cheese and lime zest, nutritional yeast and taco seasoning.

Nutrition

Serving: 4g | Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 113mg | Potassium: 139mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 219IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes

Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte (with Tazo Tea Bags)

October 8, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

A Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte with extra Tazo tea bags and cinnamon stick; a cozy fall drink!

Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte (with Tazo tea bags) is a coffeeshop copycat recipe made using Tazo Chai Concentrate from tea bags! This Pumpkin Chai Tea Latte is the perfect cozy drink and will be your new fall favorite! 

Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Lattes with extra tea bags and cinnamon sticks. A cozy fall drink!

October is here and I can finally start enjoying pumpkin. While I know most people start in August when Starbuck’s and Dunkin Donuts kick off pumpkin season, I have to wait until there is a slight chill in the air to enjoy pumpkin. This Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte is a delicious drink that you can make for a fraction of the cost of a local coffee store. 

This recipe was inspired by this At Home Iced Matcha Chai Latte. Chai concentrate is mixed with matcha for a healthy coffeeshop copycat recipe! This Pumpkin Chai Latte pairs perfectly with these Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins. Make these two recipes for the ultimate fall breakfast or brunch!  

Jump to:
  • Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte Details
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte with Tazo Tea Recipe

Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte Details

Flavor: This warm latte screams fall flavors. The chai concentrate gives the latte a sweet, spiced flavor with hints of cinnamon, ginger, cloves and black pepper. The pumpkin sauce sweetens the latte to balance the spiciness of the chai. 

Level of Difficulty: Medium! This Chai Tea Latte is quite simple to make, however, you have to prepare the chai concentrate from the Tazo Chai Tea Bags and the Pumpkin Sauce to make the latte. Don’t worry, the recipe for both makes a bunch so you can have them on hand to quickly make a delicious Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte! 

Time: 5 minutes! If you have the Pumpkin Sauce and and the Chai Concentrate made, it will only take 5 minutes to make this latte. That is less time than it would take you to stand in line at your local coffee shop! It takes about 15 minutes to make the Chai Concentrate and the Pumpkin Sauce. 

Ingredients

For the latte, only a few ingredients are required:

  • Pumpkin Sauce
  • Chai Tea Concentrate: Alternatively, you can use purchase Tazo Chai Concentrate at many large grocery stores. 
  • Milk of Choice: I like to use Whole Milk to achieve the most creamy flavor. Substitute oat milk or almond milk for a non dairy milk option. For a sweeter flavor, use coconut milk. 

To make the Pumpkin Sauce, you will need:

  • Canned Pumpkin Puree: Be sure to use real pumpkin and not pumpkin pie filling! 
  • Sweetened Condensed Milk
  • Pumpkin Pie Spice: Can you use a store bough spice or make it homemade.

To make the Chai Tea Concentrate, you will need: 

  • Tazo Chai Tea Bags: Substitute your favorite chai tea bag. 
  • Maple Syrup: Substitute brown sugar 
  • Water
Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte Ingredients: Chai Tea Bags, Maple Syrup, Pumpkin Pie Spice, Canned Pumpkin, Sweetened Condensed Milk and Whole Milk

Instructions

  1. Begin by making the Tazo Chai Concentrate. Add 3 cups of water to a medium sized pot. Tie together 10 Tazo Chai Tea Bags and place in water. Bring water to a boil. Let boil for 1 minute then reduce heat to low. Let simmer for 15 minutes. Remove from heat and remove tea bags. Stir in maple syrup. 
  2. While the Chai Concentrate is simmering, make the Pumpkin Sauce. Add canned pumpkin, sweetened condensed milk and pumpkin pie spice to a small pot. Place pot on the stove over low heat. Let heat for about 5 minutes stirring occasionally. Remove from heat and let cool. 
  3. To make the Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte, add pumpkin sauce to the bottom of a mug. 
  4. Add the Chai Concentrate to the pumpkin sauce. If the chai concentrate was cold, heat in the microwave until hot. 
  5. Warm milk over the stove or in the microwave. If using the stove, add milk to a small saucepan and heat over medium low heat until milk is warm. If using the microwave, heat for 2 minutes on high. 
  6. Using a handheld milk frother, froth milk for about 30 seconds until the liquid doubles in size. 
  7. Pour milk into mug holding back the frothed milk with a spoon. Spoon frothed milk on top of latte and sprinkle with a little pumpkin pie spice. 
Tazo Chai Tea Bags boiling to make chai concentrate

Make Chai Concentrate.

Jar of Homemade Pumpkin Sauce

Make Pumpkin Sauce on stove.

Homemade Pumpkin Sauce in bottom of mug

Add Pumpkin Sauce to bottom of mug.

The making of a Pumpkin Chai Latte! Pumpkin Sauce and Chai Concentrate in a mug.

Pour Tazo Chai Concentrate over top of Pumpkin Sauce.

Frothed and steam milk

Froth milk in a separate cup until it doubles in size.

Two steaming glasses of Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Lattes with cinnamon sticks resting on top

Pour milk on top of Pumpkin Chai mixture. Spoon frothed milk on top of latte.

Variations

  • Make this Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte light by using less Pumpkin Sauce and Almond Milk to save calories. 
  • For less chai flavor (or to save time), skip out on making the Chai Concentrate. Use one Tazo Chai Tea Bag and make seep tea in hot cup of water according to Tazo directions. Use 4 ounces of this Chai Tea in the latte. 
  • Add cinnamon sticks or star anise for extra fall flavor! 
  • To get a real coffee shop feel, add whipped cream on top! 

Equipment

Simple equipment is used to make this coffee shop worthy Chai Tea Latte! 

  • Small to Medium Size Pots
  • Mug
  • Milk Frother

Storage

I do not recommend storing the Pumpkin Chai Tea Latte after it has been made because the milk would not stay frothed. You can store the Pumpkin Sauce and the Tazo Chai Concentrate refrigerated in air tight containers. I recommend storing both for a week. 

Top tip

To get the best frothed milk, use milk with a high fat content such as whole milk or 2% milk. Whole milk will give your latte the most authentic and delicious taste that you get at local coffee shops! 

The tops of two mugs of Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Lattes. Both tops have steamed and frothed milk with sprinkles of pumpkin spice.

FAQ

What else can I use Pumpkin Sauce for?

Use Pumpkin Sauce in classic coffee lattes. Assemble the latte as directed above replacing the chai concentrate with espresso. You can also drizzle pumpkin sauce on top of ice cream, oatmeal or yogurt for extra fall flavor. 

What kind of milk froths best?

Whole milk or 2% milk are the best options for frothing. They will produce the creamiest and foamiest froth. Almond Milk will make a light and airy froth. 

Can I make this Pumpkin Chai Latte into an Iced Pumpkin Chai Latte?

Yes, you can make an Iced Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte. Simply, make the Pumpkin Sauce and the Chai Tea Concentrate. Allow them to cool and refrigerate. Add ice to a large cup with a lid. Pour in Pumpkin Sauce, Chai Tea Concentrate and top with milk. Put a lid on and give the drink a quick shake and enjoy! This recipe is very similar to the Iced Pumpkin Cream Chai Tea Latte at Starbucks.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A glass bottle filled with a creamy orange pumpkin spice coffee creamer is surrounded by autumn decor, including vibrant orange chrysanthemums, a small white pumpkin, and a glass of black coffee on wooden coasters. Coffee beans are scattered nearby.
    Pumpkin Spice Coffee Creamer with Sweetened Condensed Milk
  • A frothy iced coffee drink in a gold-rimmed glass sits on a wooden tray adorned with small white and orange pumpkins and a large orange candle. In the background is another glass of the same drink, and a jar filled with an orange-colored beverage.
    Pumpkin Cold Foam Recipe (Cold Coffee Topping)
  • A mug of cold coffee topped with cold foam and garnished with fresh strawberries.
    3 Ingredient Strawberry Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping)
  • Coffee milkshakes topped with whipped cream and chocolate syrup.
    Frozen Coffee Milkshake with Malted Milk Powder

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with [this recipe]:

  • Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
    Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)
  • Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) on plates with extra peaches and milk
    Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas!)
  • Slice of Ricotta Quiche with mushrooms and spinach on serving knife.
    Creamy Spinach Mushroom Quiche with Ricotta Cheese
  • Green Spinach Pancakes in a stack with whipped ceram
    Healthy Green Pancakes (with spinach and Greek yogurt)
Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Lattes with extra tea bags and cinnamon sticks. A cozy fall drink!
Print Recipe

Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte with Tazo Tea Recipe

Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte (with Tazo tea bags) is a coffeeshop copycat recipe made using Tazo Chai Concentrate from tea bags! This Pumpkin Chai Tea Latte is the perfect cozy drink and will be your new fall favorite! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: coffee
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 496kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Ingredients

Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte with Tazo Tea Recipe

  • 4 oz Chai Concentrate
  • 1 cup Milk
  • 2 tbsp Pumpkin Sauce
  • Pumpkin Pie Spice and Whipped Cream

Chai Concentrate

  • 10 Tazo Chai Tea Bags
  • 3 cups Water
  • 1/4 cup Maple Syrup

Pumpkin Sauce

  • 2/3 cup Pumpkin
  • 2 tsp Pumpkin Pie Spice
  • 14 oz Sweetened Condensed Milk

Instructions

Pumpkin Spice Chai Latte with Tazo Tea Recipe

  • Add pumpkin sauce to the bottom of a mug.
  • Add chai tea over top of pumpkin sauce. If using concentrate, warm chai concentrate.
  • Steam milk either on the stove or microwave for 2 minutes. Using a handheld frother, froth milk.
  • Pour milk on top of chai concentrate. Spoon frothed milk on top.
  • Optional, add whipped cream and pumpkin pie spice on top.

Chai Concentrate

  • Add water to a pot on the stove over high heat. Tie tea bags together and add to the water. Bring to a boil
  • Allow teabags to boil for 1 minute then reduce heat to a simmer. Let simmer for 15 minutes.
  • Remove from heat and stir in maple syrup. Sweetener can be adjusted to your taste.
  • Once cool, store chai concentrate refrigerated in an airtight container.

Pumpkin Sauce

  • Place a small pot on the stove over low heat. Add pumpkin, sweetened condensed milk and pumpkin pie spice.
  • Let warm for about 5 minutes. Stir together to incorporate all ingredients.
  • Remove from heat. Let cool and store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 496kcal | Carbohydrates: 105g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 222mg | Potassium: 505mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 95g | Vitamin A: 2.86IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 353mg | Iron: 5mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Fall Recipes, Recipes

5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe)

September 29, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 10 Comments

A tray of 5 ingredient meatless baked ziti, a Kraft copycat recipe

5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe) is an easy weeknight dinner! This three-cheese comfort food comes together quickly and serves a crowd. A perfect meal for busy weeknights and back to school!

A piece of golden 5 ingredient baked ziti ready to be enjoyed!

The weather is beginning to cool down and I am all about cozy comfort food. This recipe is my take on the Classic Kraft Baked Ziti recipe. With a few slight changes, I have made this recipe a family favorite!

After enjoying this Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad ALL SUMMER LONG, I knew that I needed a go-to winter pasta and this 5 Ingredient Baked Ziti is it! Pair this ziti with this Simple Brussels Sprout Salad for the ultimate fall dinner!

Jump to:
  • 5 Ingredient Baked Ziti Details
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • 5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe)

5 Ingredient Baked Ziti Details

Flavor: Because this baked ziti only has 5 ingredients, use a flavorful marinara sauce as the sauce will give your pasta all of the flavor! I like to use one with basil and garlic. 

Time: 40 minutes including prep and bake time! 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! This meal is so simple to make, I recommend it to even the most basic cook. 

Ingredients

5 ingredients is all that it takes to make this ziti casserole!

  • Ziti Pasta: Substitute ziti noodles for penne pasta or rigatoni noodles.
  • Pasta Sauce: Use a high quality sauce! I like to use Rao’s or a homemade sauce.
  • Ricotta Cheese: Substitute cream cheese which is what the Kraft recipe calls for. You can also substitute cottage cheese for a creamy baked pasta!
  • Mozzarella Cheese: Use pre-shredded mozzarella or a sliced mozzarella log. 
  • Parmesan Cheese: Grate your own cheese or use a freshly shredded parmesan cheese for the best flavor. 
5 Ingredient Baked Ziti ingredients: rigatoni noodles (substitute for ziti noodles), tomato sauce, ricotta cheese, mozzarella cheese and parmesan cheese

Instructions

  1. Begin by preheating the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Spray a 9×13 baking dish with cooking spray. 
  2. Fill a large pot with water and bring to a boil. Cook noodles to al dente (2 minutes less than minimum cook time). 
  3. While the pasta is cooking, add pasta sauce and ricotta cheese to a large saucepan over low heat. Stir together the make a pink sauce. 
  4. Once pasta is cooked, drain pasta and put back into the large bowl. Pour the ricotta sauce mixture over top of the pasta. Stir together to coat noodles.
  5. Pour half of the pasta mixture into the casserole dish. Top with one cup of shredded mozzarella cheese. Pour remaining pasta on top. Top with remaining mozzarella cheese and parmesan cheese. 
  6. Bake uncovered in the preheated oven for 25 minutes until cheese melts. Turn broiler on and broil for 2 minutes until the top becomes golden.
  7. Remove baked pasta from the oven and let pasta dish sit for 5-10 minutes. This will allow the sauce to set and sink into the noodles. 
  8. Enjoy!
Boiling noodles al dente for copycat kraft baked ziti

Cook pasta in boiling water for 2 minutes less than the package instructions.

Mixing tomato sauce and ricotta cheese together to make a creamy sauce for the 5 ingredient baked ziti (kraft copycat recipe)

On the stove over medium low heat, mix together tomato sauce and ricotta cheese.

First layer of cheesy noodles in baking dish

Mix pasta with ricotta mixture. Place half of the mixture in a 9×13 casserole dish. Sprinkle with mozzarella cheese.

Two layers of ziti noodles with mozzarella cheese in the middle

Add remaining noodles as a second layer in baking dish.

5 ingredient baked ziti topped with mozzarella cheese and parmesan cheese

Sprinkle with remaining mozzarella cheese. Sprinkle parmesan cheese on top.

Golden Baked Ziti after cooking in oven and broiling to perfection

Bake in oven until cheese is melted about 25 minutes. Broil for 2 minutes on high until cheese is golden.

Variations

This is a very simple baked ziti recipe! Try one (or all) of these variations for more delicious dinners. 

  • Add more protein while still keeping the recipe meatless by using Chickpea Pasta. Chickpea Pasta has high protein and high fiber making it a very healthy alternative to traditional pasta. 
  • Sneak in some vegetables! Sauté some spinach in olive oil and mix the spinach into the ricotta sauce mixture. 
  • Add some meat! Cook Italian sausage, lean ground beef or chicken and add to the tomato sauce to make a meat sauce.

Equipment

The most basic kitchen equipment is needed to make this creamy baked ziti!

  • Large Pot: to boil the noodles
  • Large Saucepan: to make the cheesy sauce 
  • 9×13 Baking Dish: to bake the ziti

Storage

Store baked ziti refrigerated in airtight container for 3 days. 

This 5 Ingredient Baked Ziti freezes well! You can freeze leftovers or make a tray of ziti to freeze! 

I often will bake one small ziti and use the remaining ziti as a freezer dinner. Simply follow the recipe instructions until the ziti needs to go into the oven. Be sure to put pasta in a freezer-safe baking dish. Allow ziti to cool to room temperature. Tightly cover with aluminum foil and freeze for up to 2 months. 

To bake, dethaw ziti overnight in the refrigerator. Before cooking, bring ziti to room temperature. Bake as directed. 

Top tip

When baking a previously frozen baked ziti, make sure that the center of the ziti is hot before removing it from the oven. This is a heavy pasta dish and can take time to dethaw. It may take longer to bake in the oven. If the ziti is not hot in the center, cover the ziti with aluminum foil to prevent the top from browning and return to the oven for an additional 5-10 minutes. 

FAQ

What kind of noodles can I substitute for ziti noodles?

Good substitutes for ziti noodles are penne pasta or rigatoni noodles. Rigatoni is my favorite! It is a larger tube pasta with ribs. The ribs help to hold the cheese sauce mixture on the noodles. 

What should I serve with baked ziti?

Serve baked ziti with a green salad, garlic bread or crusty bread with butter. You could also serve with a side of meatballs for some extra protein!

What is the difference between baked ziti and lasagna?

Baked Ziti is a pasta dish that is tossed with a cheesy sauce mixture and cheese. Lasagna is made by layering pasta noodles, sauce and cheese. Baked Ziti is easier to make than lasagna because you can mix the ziti mixture and pour into the pan as opposed to layering the ingredients with lasagna.

Serving a chunk of baked ziti from a casserole dish

Related

Looking for other main dish recipes? Try one of these:

  • Tray of Ham and Cheese Sammies showing layers of cheese, ham and a buttery sesame seed top.
    Ham & Cheese Sammies
  • Three bowls of Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili (Crockpot Recipe). Bowls are topped with shredded cheese, sour cream and jalapenos.
    Award Winning Venison Chili (Easy Crockpot Recipe)
  • Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice
    Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)
  • Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers. The best dish to make during dove season!
    Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with pasta dishes:

  • Easy, Everyday, Baked Meatballs in a serving bowl garnished with parmesan, basil and tomato sauce
    Oven Baked Venison Meatballs (Easy and Tasty Recipe)
  • Plate with ricotta toast and tomatoes on top.
    Cherry Tomato Ricotta Toast (Easy Appetizer Recipe)
  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Vegetable Bruschetta with cherry tomatoes, zucchini and yellow squash drizzled with a balsamic glaze
    Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash
A tray of 5 ingredient meatless baked ziti, a Kraft copycat recipe
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe)

5 Ingredient Meatless Baked Ziti (Kraft Copycat Recipe) is an easy weeknight dinner! This three-cheese comfort food comes together quickly and serves a crowd. A perfect meal for busy weeknights and back to school!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 613kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Ingredients

  • 16 oz Ziti
  • 15 oz Ricotta Cheese
  • 24 oz Pasta Sauce
  • 2 cups Shredded Mozzarella Cheese
  • 1 cup Grated Parmesan Cheese

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Spray a 9×13 baking sheet with cooking spray.
  • Cook pasta until al dente (about 2 minutes less than directed on the package).
  • In a pot over medium low heat, stir to combine tomato sauce and ricotta cheese for about 5 minutes.
  • Once pasta is cooked, add the pasta to the cheese/sauce mixture. Stir to combine.
  • Place half of the pasta in the 9×13 pan. Sprinkle with 1 cup shredded mozzarella cheese.
  • Add the remaining pasta to the dish. Sprinkle with remaining mozzarella cheese and parmesan cheese.
  • Bake for 20-25 minutes until cheese is melted.
  • Turn oven to broil. Broil baked ziti until the top is golden.
  • Remove from oven and let ziti sit for 5-10 minutes before slicing.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 613kcal | Carbohydrates: 68g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 1.127mg | Potassium: 639mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1.203IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 514mg | Iron: 3mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Winter Recipes

Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeno Bacon (Oven Baked)

September 21, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Crispy, thick-cut Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon on a wire rack fresh from the oven

Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeno Bacon is a simple recipe that adds some sweet heat to everyone’s favorite food: bacon! This easy recipe makes a spicy bacon in the oven that is the perfect addition to any brunch or big game party! 

A tray of Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon. The perfect addition to breakfast or a game day snack!

There is never a bad time to enjoy bacon and football season is the perfect time to make this Jalapeno Bacon! The bacon can be enjoyed as a snack stick or in a bloody mary. 

This recipe was inspired by a few other jalapeno and bacon recipes like these Oven Baked Jalapeno Poppers. The jalapeno peppers and bacon in this recipe make these poppers the perfect snack! This Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese gives simple stovetop popcorn a blast of fiery heat! 

Jump to:
  • Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon Details
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeño Bacon (Oven Baked)

Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon Details

Flavor: Sweet and spicy! The brown sugar adds a sweet layer to the salty bacon while the jalapeno adds the heat. The bacon is the perfect balance of sweet and spicy with the spice level only being at a low to medium heat. 

Time: 40 minutes total. That includes 5 minutes of prep time and 35 minutes of bake time. 

Level of Difficulty: This Jalapeno Bacon is super simple to make! 

Ingredients

Only 5 pantry staple ingredients are required to make this delicious treat! 

  • Light Brown Sugar
  • Black Pepper
  • Bacon: ​I suggest using a thick cut bacon. You will need less than a pound of bacon. I normally get around 10 slices on a rack. 
  • Jalapenos
  • Honey 
Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon Ingredients: thick cut bacon, black pepper, honey, light brown sugar and jalapenos

Instructions

  1. ​Start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Place tin foil on a rimmed baking sheet. Place a wire cooling rack on top of the tin foil. Set aside.
  2. Mix brown sugar and black pepper in a small bowl. Pour mixture onto a large rimmed plate. 
  3. Place each slice of bacon into the mixture. Press down so that the sugar adheres. Flip bacon over and repeat so that brown sugar is on both sides of the bacon. Place bacon on the wire rack in a single layer. Be careful not to overlap the bacon. I can normally fit around 10 strips of bacon on one rack.
  4. Bake for 20 minutes. Carefully remove pan from oven. Flip each piece of bacon over. Sprinkle jalapeno pieces on top of bacon. Drizzle with a little honey on each bacon slice. 
  5. Place pan back into the oven and cook for 15 more minutes until the desired level of crispy bacon is achieved. Cook time will depend on the thickness of the bacon. 
  6. Allow bacon to cool before serving. 
Dredging thick bacon slices through brown sugar and black pepper mixture to make candied bacon

Mix light brown sugar and black pepper. Place in a shallow dish and dredge bacon through adhering brown sugar to both slides of the bacon slice.

Thick cut bacon strip on wire rack ready to go into the oven

Place bacon slices on a wire rack in a single layer. Bake for 20 minutes. Remove from oven and flip bacon over.

Sprinkle diced jalapenos on top of bacon and drizzle with honey. Return baking sheet to the oven and bake for an additional 15 minutes until bacon is crispy.

Variations

For a less spicy version, use pickled jalapenos instead of regular jalapenos. 

To make the Ultimate Candied Bacon, double the amount of brown sugar in the recipe. 

For more flavors, mix some additional spices such as garlic powder, paprika or red chili pepper to the brown sugar mix. 

Equipment

​Only kitchen staples are needed in this recipe!

  • Rimmed Cookie Sheet
  • Wire Cooling Rack
  • Tin Foil
  • Small to Medium Bowl
  • Large Plate or Shallow Dish 

Storage

​If you are lucky enough to have any of this Honey Jalapeno Bacon left over, store it refrigerated in an airtight container. This bacon is delicious eaten cold. Or, reheat the bacon on a warm pan or in the oven. Be careful not to cook too long as bacon is already crispy. 

A plate of spicy bacon with jalapenos shining on top!

Top tip

Leave the diced jalapenos off a few of the bacon pieces so that everyone can enjoy the candied bacon. Also, be very careful when removing the bacon from the oven. Bacon grease will accumulate in the bottom of the pan and it is very hot. Handle carefully and dispose of excess grease when it has cooled. 

FAQ

How do I serve Jalapeno Bacon?

Serve Jalapeno Bacon as snack sticks. Trust me, this bacon is so good that it can be enjoyed on its own and it is a great addition to a snack table. Or, serve it in a Spicy Bloody Mary drink. You can also enjoy this candied bacon with eggs, on bacon melts with cheddar cheese or on your favorite sandwich or wrap! 

How long does Candied Jalapeno Bacon last?

Candied Jalapeno Bacon lasts up to 4-5 days stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Allow bacon to cool completely to room temperature before placing in container or large ziplock bag. This will help to prevent the bacon from sticking together. 

What is Pig Candy?

 ​Pig candy is another word for Candied Bacon! In this recipe, we made a spicy pig candy! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A delicious bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese. The perfect movie night snack!
    Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese
  • Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers. The best dish to make during dove season!
    Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers
  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam
    Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Candied Jalapeno Bacon:

  • Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
    Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)
  • Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
    Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)
  • Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim
    Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup
  • Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) on plates with extra peaches and milk
    Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas!)
Crispy, thick-cut Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon on a wire rack fresh from the oven
Print Recipe

Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeño Bacon (Oven Baked)

Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeno Bacon is a simple recipe that adds some sweet heat to everyone's favorite food: bacon! This easy recipe makes a spicy bacon in the oven that is the perfect addition to any brunch or big game party! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Breakfast, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 5
Calories: 370kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Rimmed Cookie Sheet
  • Wire Baking Rack
  • Small Bowl
  • Large Plate

Ingredients

  • 1/3 cup Brown Sugar plus 2 tablespoons
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper
  • 10 slices Thick Sliced Bacon
  • 1 Jalapeño Finely Chopped
  • 1 tbsp Honey

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Place tin foil on rimmed baking sheet and wire cooling rack on top.
  • Mix brown sugar and black sugar in a small bowl. Pour onto a large plate.
  • Dip both sides of bacon strips into brown sugar mixture. Press brown sugar to bacon. Place on cooling rack.
  • Bake for 20 minutes. Remove from oven and flip bacon. Sprinkle bacon with jalapenos and drizzle with honey.
  • Place bacon back in the oven. Bake for another 10-15 minutes until desired crispiness is achieved.

Nutrition

Serving: 5g | Calories: 370kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 48mg | Sodium: 714mg | Potassium: 171mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 57IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 17mg | Iron: 0.4mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Breakfast, Recipes

Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese

September 13, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 10 Comments

A delicious bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese. The perfect movie night snack!

Easy Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese is a simple popcorn recipe with a hint of heat! Make this stovetop popcorn recipe for game day or your next movie night! 

A delicious bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn dusted with parmesan cheese

Fall is here and that means cozy movie nights at home and watching football games with friends and family. To me, this all means that snacking season is upon us! Homemade popcorn is my go to snack. The flavor combinations you can come up with are endless and cooking popcorn on the stove is impressive to guests!

This Jalapeno Popcorn recipe was inspired by my Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning Recipe. This recipe brings the tangy flavor of a dill pickle into a bite sized piece of popcorn! For a zesty option, try this Easy Mexican Popcorn using Taco Seasoning. If you are looking for a sweet option, try this Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board. This simple board has all of the sweet flavors of fall apples accompanied with the best dips. 

Jump to:
  • Jalapeno Popcorn Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to make Jalapeno Popcorn
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Jalapeno Popcorn Recipe (with Parmesan Cheese)

Jalapeno Popcorn Details

  • Flavor: Salty and Spicy! The spice flavor is not overwhelming and the saltiness of the popcorn balances the spice. Once you have one bite, you will be back for a handful! 
  • Time: 10 minutes.
  • Level of Difficulty: Simple! Making popcorn is simple. You just need have patience and be attentive because a few burnt kernels will ruin an entire popcorn batch. 

Ingredients

Just a few simple ingredients are needed to make this tasty treat! 

Jalapeno Popcorn Ingredients: popcorn kernels, pickled jalapenos, parmesan cheese, vegetable oil and jalapenos (for garnish)
Note: Melted butter and salt not photographed
  • Vegetable Oil: Substitute another neutral tasting oil such as coconut oil or avocado oil. 
  • Popcorn Kernels: Alternatively, you could use microwave popcorn or cooked popcorn. 
  • Pickled Jalapenos: Substitute fresh jalapenos for more heat. 
  • Parmesan Cheese: Could use another cheese powder or nutritional yeast. 
  • Melted Butter
  • Salt

How to make Jalapeno Popcorn

  1. Dry pickled jalapenos. Place pickled jalapenos on a paper towel lined plate. Blot jalapenos dry using a paper towel.
  2. Heat 2 tablespoons of oil in a medium pot to medium heat. Once oil is warm, cook jalapenos until they begin to brown. Remove from pot and set aside.
  3. Add remaining oil to the same pot. Add popcorn kernels in an even layer and place lid on top. 
  4. Within 2-3 minutes, kernels will begin to pop. Shake pot occasionally to move kernels around. Popcorn is done popping when there is longer than 2 seconds in between pops. Remove pot from heat.
  5. Add melted butter, pickled jalapenos and salt into popcorn bowl and stir to combine.
  6. Once popcorn has slightly cooled, stir in parmesan cheese. 
Jalapenos frying in pan to go into jalapeno popcorn

Cook jalapenos in pot until golden.

Popcorn kernels in a pot ready to pop

Add popcorn kernels to the same pot.

Fresh stovetop popcorn hot off of the stove

Allow popcorn to pop until there is 2 seconds in between pops.

Mixing melted butter and jalapenos with stovetop popcorn

Stir in melted butter, jalapenos and salt. Once popcorn has cooled, add parmesan cheese.

Variations

There are so many ways to spice up popcorn. Try one of these simple recipe twists!

  • Fry pieces of bacon with the jalapenos to make a Bacon Jalapeno Popcorn. 
  • Add seasonings. Add garlic powder, cumin or cayenne pepper. 
  • Add more heat. If you want all of the spice, add some hot sauce with the melted butter. 

Equipment

You don’t need a popcorn maker to make homemade popcorn! Grab these kitchen staples.  

  • Plate lined with paper towels. 
  • Medium size heavy-bottomed pot 

Storage

Stovetop popcorn is best served immediately. After adding butter, the popcorn can become soggy when storing. I recommend storing popcorn without any seasoning or oils. Allow the popcorn to cool to room temperature and then store in an airtight container. 

Top tip

Do not leave your popcorn! When popping the popcorn, be vigilant. Popcorn can burn quickly and a few burnt kernels can ruin the whole batch. Stay in the kitchen while the popcorn pops and be sure to remove the popcorn from heat as soon as there is longer than 2 seconds between pops.

A buttery bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn topped with jalapenos and parmesan cheese

FAQ

Is Jalapeno Popcorn spicy?

Jalapeno Popcorn is slightly spicy. The flavor of the jalapenos provides some heat in the popcorn. You can control the spiciness of the popcorn by adding more or less jalapenos. 

Can I use bagged popcorn to make Jalapeno Popcorn?

Yes, you can use bagged popcorn (store bought or microwave) to make Jalapeno Popcorn. Keep in mind, pre-made or bagged popcorn can have added salt and/or butter that can alter the flavor of this Jalapeno Popcorn. 

How should I serve Jalapeno Popcorn?

Serve Jalapeno Popcorn in a large bowl to share or in individual serving cups. I like to set up a Popcorn Bar with different types of popcorn so that everyone can enjoy this party snack! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Reaching for a bite of salty and tangy Dill Pickle Popcorn
    Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning
  • A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
    Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)
  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers. The best dish to make during dove season!
    Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with [this recipe]:

  • Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
    Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)
  • Spiked Cranberry Lemonade, a refreshing whiskey and vodka cocktail similar to Fisher's Island Lemonade
    Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)
  • Homemade Maryland Crab Soup on serving tray with beers and extra crab legs
    Traditional Maryland Crab Soup (Phillips Copycat Recipe)
  • Three bowls of Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili (Crockpot Recipe). Bowls are topped with shredded cheese, sour cream and jalapenos.
    Award Winning Venison Chili (Easy Crockpot Recipe)
A delicious bowl of Jalapeno Popcorn dusted with parmesan cheese
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Jalapeno Popcorn Recipe (with Parmesan Cheese)

Easy Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese is a simple popcorn recipe with a hint of heat! Make this stovetop popcorn recipe for game day or your next movie night! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 261kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Plate with Paper Towels
  • Medium Pot

Ingredients

  • 1/4 cup Vegetable Oil
  • 1/4 cup Popcorn Kernels
  • 1/3 cup Picked Jalapenos
  • 1/2 cup Parmesan Cheese
  • 2 tbsp Butter Melted
  • 1/2 tsp Salt

Instructions

  • Place pickled jalapenos on a paper towel lined plate and pat dry.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil to a medium pot over medium heat. Cook jalapenos for about 5 minutes until golden brown. Remove from pan.
  • Add remaining 2 tablespoons of vegetable oil. Add popcorn kernels and place lid on pot. Allow kernels to pop, occasionally shaking the pot. Once kernels stop popping for 2 seconds in between pops, remove popcorn from heat.
  • Add melted butter, jalapenos and salt. Stir to combine.
  • Once popcorn has cooled to a warm temperature, sprinkle with parmesan cheese.

Nutrition

Serving: 4g | Calories: 261kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 24mg | Sodium: 726mg | Potassium: 63mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 465IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 153mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes

Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers

September 11, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers. The best dish to make during dove season!

Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers are a delicious dove breast recipe. Try this wild game recipe baked in the oven for one of the best dove recipes!

Tray of delicious Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers with extra jalapenos on the side

I come from a family of hunters and a husband who lives to hunt. Dove are migratory birds and dove season officially kicks off hunting season where I live. My husband loves to host a large gathering for dove hunting every year. While I do not hunt, I respect the animals and don’t want anything to go to waste. I created this recipe as a way to enjoy dove without having to turn on the grill. 

If you are looking for another wild game recipe, try this Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili. If you come to my house at all during football season, you are guaranteed to have a big, ol’ bowl of this! 

Jump to:
  • Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper Details
  • Ingredients
  • Marinade Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper (Wild Game Recipe)

Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper Details

Flavor: ​Sweet, spicy and salty! The sweet and salty flavor comes from the bacon and the spiciness comes from the jalapeno pepper. The dove breast is in the middle has a mild meaty taste.

Time: ​An hour and 15 minutes. That includes 15 minutes of prep time to make the dove poppers and an hour of hands-off bake time. 

Level of Difficulty: ​Medium. While these dove poppers are not difficult to make, they do require some effort with slicing the dove breast meat and assembling the poppers. 

Ingredients

​Most ingredients for this easy recipe can be found at your local grocery store. Get in touch with some dove hunters for the meat! 

Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Popper Ingredients: Jalapenos, Bacon Slices, Cream Cheese and Dove Breast
  • Dove Breast: ​Removed from breast bone
  • Jalapenos: Seeds and ribs removed. Substitute mini bell peppers. 
  • Bacon: Use thin sliced bacon.
  • Cream Cheese

Marinade Ingredients

​This marinade is a simple recipe using pantry staples. If you are looking for an easier solution, use store bought Italian dressing. Both marinades will make flavorful dove recipes! 

Marinade ingredients for Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers: orange juice, soy sauce, brown sugar, salt, black pepper and garlic cloves
  • Orange Juice
  • Garlic Cloves: ​Alternatively, substitute garlic powder. 
  • Salt
  • Black Pepper
  • Brown Sugar 
  • Soy Sauce

Instructions

  1. Begin by making the marinade. Add soy sauce, orange juice, garlic cloves and brown sugar to a large bowl. Stir to combine. Season doves with salt and black pepper. Place doves in bowl and stir to coat all breast with the sauce. Marinate for at least 2 hours or overnight.
  2. Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Spray a 9×13 pan with cooking spray.
  3. Slice jalapenos in half and remove the seeds and the ribs.
  4. Using a butter knife, smear cream cheese on the inside of the jalapeno peppers.
  5. Place dove breasts on top of cream cheese. If the dove breast appear too large for the jalapenos, slice the breast in half. 
  6. Wrap entire jalapeno with bacon. Use a toothpick to secure the popper. 
  7. Place dover poppers in a single layer in the 9×13 pan. 
  8. Bake in a 350 degree oven for an hour to an hour and a half until bacon is crispy. 
Jalapenos sliced in half to make Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers

Slice jalapenos in half and remove seeds and ribs.

Jalapenos filled with cream cheese to make Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers

Smear cream cheese inside jalapeno halves.

Jalapeno halves with cream cheese and dove breast to make Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers

Place dove breast on top of cream cheese.

Jalapeno dove poppers with cream cheese, dove breast and bacon ready to go into the oven and bake

Add bacon on top of dove breast. Secure with a toothpick. Bake in oven.

Variations

​There are so many delicious and tasty ways to enjoy these Bacon-Wrapped Dove Jalapeno Poppers! Here are a few fun variations. 

  • For a lighter Bacon Dove Popper, only use 1/4 of a slice of bacon. Since the bacon slice will not be large enough to wrap around the dove popper, fold the bacon and place on top of the dove meat. Secure the bacon on top using a toothpick. Alternatively, you could slice the bacon into a small bite sized piece for less calories. 
  • For a sweeter Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper, drizzle honey on top of bacon during the last 10 minutes of baking. This sweetness will help to balance out the spicy jalapeno. 
  • For something extra, place a banana pepper on top of the bacon and secure with a toothpick before baking. 
  • For a less spicy version, substitute the jalapeno peppers with a mini bell pepper. If you still want a little zing, add a slice of jalapeno on top of the bacon! 
  • Don’t want to turn the oven on?! Try making these poppers on the grill! Grill over medium-high heat with the grill top open. Rotate the poppers often. Dove poppers are ready to enjoy when the bacon is crispy. 

Equipment

  • Large Bowl or Large Ziplock Bag for marinading dove breast
  • Cutting Board to slice dove breast, jalapenos and, possibly, bacon
  • 9×13 Pan or other large baking dish to bake dove poppers
  • Toothpicks or small wooden skewers to secure dove poppers 

Storage

These Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers are best consumed hot out of the oven. Because the dove poppers are baked, the jalapeno softens and does not hold up well. You can refrigerate the dove poppers for up to two days. The poppers will become soft but still be tasty. If storing in the refrigerator, store in an airtight container. 

Close up shot of an Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Popper showing the layers of dove breast, cream cheese and crispy bacon on top of a jalapeno slice

Top tip

If the dove breast appears too large for the jalapeno, slice it in half. Keep in mind, the breast will shrink as they bake due to water and juices evaporating and leaking out. So, if you slice the dove breast in half, after baking the breast will be bite sized. This is a great way to serve these dove poppers to someone who may be leery of the taste of dove.

If slicing the dove breast in half, cooking time will need to be reduced. I found that the smaller poppers take one hour in the oven. 

FAQ

How do I remove dove breast from the bone?

Remove dove breast from the bone by pressing the knife down and away from the bone. The dove meat is tender. Here is a great YouTube video showing how to remove dove breast from the bone. 
​There are many other tutorials on YouTube for how to handle removing feathers and slicing the whole bird. 

How should I serve Dove Poppers?

Serve Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers as a handheld snack. These are a favorite recipe for a happy hour appetizer or to enjoy during a football game. If you want to make these dove poppers a main course, slice the poppers up and serve them over top of wild rice. Like red meat, the ‘filet mignon of the sky’ pairs well with red wine. 

What temperature should I cook dove to?

Dove is a red meat and is best served medium rare. To cook a dove breast to medium rare, cook until the internal temperature is 130 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit. This should allow the meat to remain juicy and pink. 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Three bowls of Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili (Crockpot Recipe). Bowls are topped with shredded cheese, sour cream and jalapenos.
    Award Winning Venison Chili (Easy Crockpot Recipe)
  • A plate full of Honey Old Bay Wings served with the homemade honey old bay sauce and ranch dressing.
    Crispy Honey Old Bay Wings (Oven Baked)
  • Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice
    Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)
  • Plate of roasted fish with garlic cherry tomatoes served over pasta with basil garnish
    One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers:

  • Reaching for a bite of salty and tangy Dill Pickle Popcorn
    Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning
  • Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers covered in sauce with celery and ranch sauce
    Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers
  • Smokey Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, onions, cilantro and chips
    Smoky Mexican Bean Dip (Skillet Dip)
  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board

Oven Baked Jalapeno Dove Poppers. The best dish to make during dove season!
Print Recipe

Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper (Wild Game Recipe)

Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Poppers are a delicious dove breast recipe. Try this wild game recipe baked in the oven for one of the best dove recipes!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 15 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 747kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large Bowl for marinating
  • Toothpicks
  • 9×13 Baking Pan

Ingredients

  • 10 Dove Breast Deboned
  • 8 Jalapenos
  • 4 oz Cream Cheese Softened
  • 1/2 lb Bacon Slices Sliced in Half or Quarters

Marinade

  • 1/2 cup Orange Juice
  • 1/4 cup Soy Sauce
  • 2 tbsp Brown Sugar
  • 4 Garlic Cloves minced
  • 1 tsp Salt
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper

Instructions

Marinade

  • Add orange juice, soy sauce, brown sugar, garlic cloves, salt and pepper to a large bowl or large ziplock bag. Add dove. Marinate for at least 2 hours or up to overnight.

Oven Baked Jalapeno Bacon Dove Popper

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Spray a 9×13 baking dish with cooking spray.
  • Slice jalapenos in half and remove the ribs and seeds.
  • Spread cream cheese on insides of jalapeno.
  • Place dove breast on top of cream cheese.
  • Wrap jalapeno and dove with bacon.
  • Bake for a total of 1 hour to 1 hour and 30 minutes until bacon is crispy.

Nutrition

Serving: 4g | Calories: 747kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 69g | Fat: 45g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 236mg | Sodium: 3.053mg | Potassium: 808mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1.407IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 84mg | Iron: 11mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Fall Recipes, Main Course, Recipes

Almond Joy Martini Recipe (Vodka Cocktail with Chocolate)

September 6, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

An Almond Joy Martini with a cocktail shaker and Almond Joy candy bars on a wooden tray.

Try this delicious Almond Joy Martini Recipe! This vodka cocktail with chocolate tastes just like an Almond Joy candy bar in chilled martini glass! 

Looking for a fancy, after dinner drink? An Almond Joy Martini is a versatile drink that could be served at Christmas (the coconut flakes will resemble snow) or at Halloween so the adults can enjoy halloween candy in a glass! 

This recipe was inspired by my other candy themed recipes! Try this Payday Bar Chex Mix for a handheld snack that tastes like the nostalgic peanut caramel bar. Or, try these Browned Butter S’mores Bars. Think of a rice krispy treat mixed golden graham cereal and you will dream up these squares! 

Jump to:
  • Almond Joy Martini Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to make an Almond Joy Martini
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Almond Joy Martini Recipe (Vodka Cocktail with Chocolate)

Almond Joy Martini Details

Taste: ​Sweet! This martini tastes like a classic Almond Joy candy bar in liquid form. With flavors of chocolate, coconut and hazelnut, you won’t be able to resist this sweet drink. 

Time: ​Make this martini in 5 minutes or less! 

Level of Difficulty: ​Simple! All that is required is adding the ingredients to a mixer, shaking and straining into martini glasses! 

Ingredients

Almond Joy Martini ingredients: vodka, coconut rum, amaretto, creme de cacao and creme of coconut.
  • Vodka
  • Coconut-Flavored Rum
  • Amaretto Liqueur: ​I like to use Disaronno Amaretto. 
  • Creme de Cacao: This is a chocolate-flavored liqueur. Godiva Chocolate Liqueur is a delicious option! If you do not have this ingredient, you could use a chocolate vodka.
  • Creme of Coconut: ​This is coconut cream that has been sweetened and processed to create a very thick syrup. If you do not like sweet drinks, substitute this ingredient for coconut milk, light cream or milk. 
  • Shredded Coconut: ​Optional, however, coconut is great as a garnish!
  • Chocolate Syrup: ​The syrup would also be used to decorate the interior of the glass. 

How to make an Almond Joy Martini

  1. Chill Martini Glass. ​If using the chocolate syrup, pour syrup around the rim of the glass. Tilt glass in your hands so that the syrup runs down the inside of the glass. Dip glass into shredded coconut. Place glass in freezer. 
  2. Add ingredients. ​Fill a cocktail shaker half way with ice. Add the vodka, coconut rum, amaretto liqueur, Creme de Cacao and Creme of Coconut to the shaker. Secure the lid. 
  3. Shake martini. ​Vigorously shake the cocktail shaker for 20-30 seconds until the exterior of the cocktail shaker is cold and icy. 
  4. Serve drink. Pour contents of the shaker into the prepared cocktail glass and enjoy! 

Variations

  • For a more Chocolatey martini, use Three Olives Chocolate Vodka in place of the regular vodka and the Creme de Cacao! 
  • For a lighter version, do not use the Creme of Coconut and use almond milk or coconut milk in place. 
  • For a nuttier version, rim the martini glass with chopped almonds in place of coconut. 

Equipment

​Minimal equipment is needed for this easy cocktail recipe! 

  • Martini Glass
  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Jigger or Shot Glass
  • Small Plate (to garnish) 

Storage

If you have leftovers of this delicious Almond Joy cocktail, store refrigerated in an airtight container. Before serving, add drink mix to a cocktail shaker and mix again. Pour into a chilled glass and enjoy!

Top tip

​If making these Almond Joy Martinis for a crowd, prepare the glasses ahead of time by pouring chocolate sauce into glasses and rimming the glasses with coconut flakes. Have the cocktail mixed in a large shaker and shake when ready! 

Almond Joy Martini showing a frothy top with a coconut rim.

FAQ

What is an Almond Joy?

An Almond Joy is a candy bar that contains almonds, shredded coconut and is covered in hardened dark chocolate. 

When should I serve an Almond Joy Martini?

You can serve an Almond Joy Martini any time! This is a sweet drink so it would be delicious after dinner. It would also be a fun Christmas cocktail to serve as the coconut flakes can resemble snow! Or, serve it at a Halloween party so that the adults can enjoy an alcoholic candy bar in a glass!

How can I garnish an Almond Joy Martini?

Garnish an Almond Joy Martini with chocolate syrup and shaved coconut. Or, add chopped almonds to the rim. Flavored sugar is always a hit! Try this Coconut Sugar Cookie or this Dark Chocolate Drizzle Sugar ​from Coffee Rendezbrew! 

Related

Looking for other tasty cocktail recipes like this? Try one of these:

  • Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
    Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)
  • Hand reaching to try a delicious and classic espresso martini made with rum
    Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)
  • Spiked Cranberry Lemonade, a refreshing whiskey and vodka cocktail similar to Fisher's Island Lemonade
    Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)
  • Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim
    Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

Pairing

Pair this sweet cocktail with one of these equally sweet desserts:

  • RumChata cupcake with beautiful icing on a rustic board
    The BEST RumChata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix)
  • Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting on top of beautiful cupcakes
    Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods) 
  • Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
    Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)
  • A plate of butterfly-shaped sugar and butter cookies topped with pink, red, and white sprinkles. These delightful treats are arranged on a stack of round plates, with a blurred background showcasing more cookies and a glass of milk.
    Roll Out Sugar Cookies with Sprinkles (Easy Recipe)

An Almond Joy Martini with a cocktail shaker and Almond Joy candy bars on a wooden tray.
Print Recipe

Almond Joy Martini Recipe (Vodka Cocktail with Chocolate)

Try this delicious Almond Joy Martini Recipe! This vodka cocktail with chocolate tastes just like an Almond Joy candy bar in chilled martini glass! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 293kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Jigger or Shot Glass
  • Martini Glass
  • Small Plate

Ingredients

  • 1 oz Vodka
  • 1 oz Coconut Rum
  • 1/2 oz Amaretto or Hazelnut Liqueur
  • 1/2 oz Creme de Cocoa
  • 1 oz Cream of Coconut
  • Chocolate Syrup for garnish
  • Coconut Flakes for garnish

Instructions

  • If garnishing the martini glass, pour chocolate around glass rim and tilt to spread chocolate sauce inside glass. Press glass into coconut. Place in freezer.
  • Add ice to a cocktail shaker.
  • Add all ingredients into cocktail shaker and shake vigourously for 20 seconds until the outside of the glass becomes cold and icy.
  • Pour into a chilled martini glass. Enjoy.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 293kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 0.3mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 28g

Filed Under: Cocktails, Recipes, Winter Recipes

Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods) 

August 31, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting on top of beautiful cupcakes

Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods) is a twist on the classic buttercream frosting. This cinnamon flavored frosting is ideal for warm, fall baked treats. 

Fall is almost here and that brings a crispness outside and a warm feeling in the kitchen. When I think of fall, I smell all the warm flavors of cinnamon and spice. This creamy cinnamon buttercream is the perfect compliment to the delicious baked goods you will be whipping up in the kitchen. 

This recipe was inspired by my RumChata Cupcakes. These cupcakes are made with the sweet, cinnamon flavored liqueur and a RumChata frosting. The frosting recipe made me think that it would be fun to make a similar recipe without the use of alcohol. From there, this buttercream recipe was born. 

Jump to:
  • Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to make Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods)


Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting Details

Flavor: Sweet with warm hints of cinnamon! This frosting is light, fluffy and sweet. However, it is not as sweet as the frosting made at most grocery store bakeries. 

Time: Whip up this frosting in less than 10 minutes!

Level of Difficulty: Simple. If you can use a stand mixer or hand mixer, you can make this perfect frosting.

Ingredients

No fancy ingredients are required to make a light and fluffy frosting.

Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting ingredients: butter, vanilla, cinnamon, heavy cream and powdered sugar
  • Powdered Sugar
  • Unsalted Butter
  • Heavy Cream
  • Vanilla Extract
  • Ground Cinnamon
  • Pinch of Salt

How to make Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting

  1. To a high speed electric mixer, add the butter and mix for 2 minutes using the paddle attachment. Butter should be light and fluffy. 
  2. Gradually, add 2 cups of powdered sugar and mix until combined.
  3. Add the vanilla extract, ground cinnamon and heavy cream and mix until combined. 
  4. Finally, add the remaining powdered sugar and mix for 3-4 minutes until smooth. 
Whipped butter for Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting

Whip butter in a stand or electric mixer for 2 minutes.

Whipped butter, heavy cream, cinnamon, vanilla and powdered sugar in mixing bowl.

Add 2 cups powdered sugar, cinnamon, vanilla and heavy whipping cream.

Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting with remaining two cups of powdered sugar in mixing bowl.

Add remaining two cups of powdered sugar.

Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting mixed together in mixing bowl

Mix until smooth. Now, Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting is ready go on baked goods.

Variations

  • Add food coloring for fun color pops on your baked goods!
  • Substitute a liqueur or coconut milk in place of the heavy cream for even more flavor. 
  • Use pumpkin pie spice or apple pie spice in place of the ground cinnamon for a different taste. 

Equipment

  • High speed mixer with large mixing bowl
  • Paddle Attachment
  • Spatula 
  • Optional: Pastry bag and M Tip for decorating 

Storage

Any extra buttercream frosting can be stored at room temperature for up to 72 hours. If not planning to use the frosting within 72 hours, refrigerate. Before using, bring frosting back to room temperature. You may have to mix it again to get it to the right consistency. This Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting can also be frozen! Freeze in a freezer bag or airtight container. Thaw in the fridge overnight and then bring to room temperature before using. 

Top tip

Make sure that your butter is at room temperature and soft before using. I recommend leaving butter on the counter overnight before using. If the butter is too hard, resist the urge to put it in the microwave for a few seconds. This never ends well for me. The frosting will not mix correctly with melting butter. Also, have a spatula handy when mixing the frosting. You will need to scrape the sides of the bowl and the paddle attachment to make sure that all ingredients are fully incorporated. 

Piping bag full of Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting piping frosting on top of cupcakes

FAQ

What can I use Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting on?

The options are endless for using this Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting! Aside from eating it off the spoon (which I am not against), try this frosting on: 
Pumpkin Cake
Spice Cake
Cinnamon Cupcakes
Pumpkin Recipes
Cinnamon Rolls
Sweet Potato Cake
Carrot Cake 
Churro Cupcakes 

Will my Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting melt? 

Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting will not easily melt and will be stable throughout heat and humidity. This is due to the combination of butter and high amount of sugar. Butters melting point is at 98.6 degrees Fahrenheit. If serving this icing on a hot and humid day, try to keep cool and out of the sun prior to serving.

Related

Looking for other sweet recipes? Try one of these:

  • RumChata cupcake with beautiful icing on a rustic board
    The BEST RumChata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix)
  • Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
    Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)
  • Mini Margarita Cheesecakes on serving board with limes and graham crackers
    Margarita Cheesecake Bites with Homemade Graham Cracker Crusts
  • Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip with apples, grapes, graham crackers, cookies and pumpkins
    Caramel Pumpkin Cream Cheese Dip (gingersnap dip)

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with [this recipe]:

  • Two glasses of White Christmas Cosmopolitans garnished with sugared cranberries
    White Christmas Cosmo
  • Maple Pecan Coffee made with Cold Brew, Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and cinnamon sticks
    Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew
  • Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples
    Warm Apple Pie Latte
  • Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim
    Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup
Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting on top of beautiful cupcakes
Print Recipe

Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods)

Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting (for fall baked goods) is a twist on the classic buttercream frosting. This cinnamon flavored frosting is ideal for warm, fall baked goods.  
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 458kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Stand Mixer
  • Spatula

Ingredients

  • 4 cups Powdered Sugar Divided
  • 1 cup Unsalted Butter (2 Sticks)
  • 3/4 tsp Ground Cinnamon
  • 1 tsp Vanilla
  • 3 tbsp Heavy Cream

Instructions

  • Add butter to a stand mixer and mix for 2 minutes until butter is whipped and light.
  • To the butter, add 2 cups of powdered sugar, vanilla, and heavy whipping cream. Mix at medium speed until smooth. 
  • Add remaining 2 cups of powdered sugar and mix until incorporated.
  • Use a piping bag and tip to frost baked goods.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 458kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 67mg | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 15mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 59g | Vitamin A: 792IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Filed Under: Dessert, Fall Recipes, Recipes

The BEST RumChata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix)

August 31, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

RumChata cupcake with beautiful icing on a rustic board

The BEST RumChata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix) is a simple cupcake recipe that combines the sweet and creamy flavor of RumChata with a vanilla cake mix!

While RumChata can be enjoyed any time of year, the sweet cinnamon flavor is reminiscent of fall to me. These boozy cupcakes will be the star of any dinner party menu or holiday party this year! The best part is that they are made using minimal ingredients and a cake mix, giving you more time to enjoy your family and friends. 

This recipe was inspired by these Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe). A cake mix is the base of the recipe with some flavorful add-ins. For a traditional fall recipe, try this Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip. This dip tastes like fall and will feed a crowd. If you are looking for a non-alcoholic frosting, try using this Easy Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting. The cinnamon flavoring perfectly pairs with the RumChata Cupcakes. The frosting goes well on any fall dessert.

Jump to:
  • RumChata Cupcake Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to Bake RumChata Cupcakes
  • RumChata Frosting Recipe
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • The BEST Rumchata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix)

RumChata Cupcake Details

Flavor: Sweet with hints of cinnamon. The flavor of these cupcakes reminds me of a less sweet cinnamon toast crunch cereal. 

Time: 25 minutes. It takes about 10 minutes to mix the batter and 15 minutes in the oven. No time at all to make the best new cupcake flavor. 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! If you can mix batter using a handheld mixer or stand mixer, you can make these cupcakes. 

Ingredients

  • Yellow or White Cake Mix
  • Melted Butter: You could substitute vegetable oil.
  • Eggs
  • Rumchata 

Rumchata Frosting Ingredients

  • Powdered Sugar
  • Vanilla Extract
  • Rumchata
  • Unsalted Butter
  • Salt 
RumChata Cupcake Ingredients: white cake mix, butter, RumChata, eggs

RumChata Cupcake Ingredients

RumChata Frosting Ingredients: RumChata, Powdered Sugar, Butter, Salt and Vanilla

RumChata Frosting Ingredients

How to Bake RumChata Cupcakes

  1. Begin by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Place cupcake liners inside cupcake pan and spray with cooking spray. 
  2. Next, to a large bowl or electric mixer, add cake mix, RumChata, eggs and melted butter. Mix at medium speed for 2 minutes just until mixture is combined.
  3. Pour batter into cupcake tins filling about 1/3 of the way up.
  4. Bake for 16-20 minutes until an inserted toothpick is removed clean from the center of the cupcake. 
  5. Allow cupcakes to cool on a wire cooling rack. 
  6. Finally, once cupcakes are completely cooled, use a piping bag to frost cupcakes. 
Cupcake Tin with cupcake liners sprayed with vegetable oil.

Place cupcake liners into a cupcake tin and spray with vegetable oil.

All ingredients in mixing bowl to make RumChata Cupcakes

Add cake mix, RumChata, eggs and melted butter to a large mixing bowl.

All ingredients mixed together to bake RumChata cupcakes.

Mix ingredients for 2 minutes until combined.

RumChata cupcakes in cupcake tin ready to bake in the oven.

Bake at 350 degrees for 16-20 minutes until a toothpick is removed clean.

RumChata Frosting Recipe

  1. Add butter to a stand mixer and mix for 2 minutes until butter is whipped and light. 
  2. To the butter, add 2 cups of powdered sugar, vanilla, and rumchata. Mix at medium speed until smooth. 
  3. Add remaining 2 cups of powdered sugar and mix until light and fluffy. 
  4. Lastly, frost cooled cupcakes. Pipe frosting using a piping bag and a round tip. 
Whipped butter, powdered sugar, vanilla and RumChata in mixing bowl for frosting

Whip butter for 2 minutes in stand mixer. Add powdered sugar, vanilla, RumChata and salt.

All ingredients mixed together for RumChata Cupcake Frosting

Mix ingredients until light and fluffy.

Variations

This recipe is so versatile and simple. Switch this recipe up by using a different box mix such as a Pumpkin Spice or Chocolate Cake Mix. Or, use a different frosting. Try my Cinnamon Buttercream Frosting for a non-boozy and simple icing option. 

Equipment

There is no fancy baking equipment is required here! 

  • Cupcake Tin
  • Paper Liners
  • Stand Mixer or Hand Mixer
  • Toothpick (to test doneness of cupcakes)
  • Wire Cooling Rack 
  • Piping Bag or Large Ziplock bag
  • Piping Tip

Storage

Store RumChata Cupcakes refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 5 days. Store leftover frosting refrigerated for up to a week or freeze for up to 3 months. Remember to allow the frosting to come to room temperature before icing baked goods. 

Top tip

Do not overmix the batter! Overmixing the batter causes cupcakes to sink in the middle by adding pockets of air within the batter. Mix cupcakes until the batter is just combined. Furthermore, resist the urge to open the oven door multiple times during baking and use an oven thermometer to make sure that your oven temperature is accurate. 

FAQ

What is RumChata?

RumChata is a cinnamon-flavored liqueur made from Caribbean Rum, Wisconsin dairy and Mexican Spices. RumChata is often used to make sweet coffee drinks, cinnamon toast shots or added to hot chocolate. 

How can you enjoy RumChata?

You can enjoy RumChata on the rocks, in a cocktail or in many other drink recipes. You can also bake with RumChata as seen in these epic adult party cupcakes! 

What alcohol is in RumChata?

The alcohol in RumChata is the perfect blend of rum. 

When should I serve RumChata Cupcakes?

RumChata Cupcakes are perfect to serve at many types of occasions. Because the liqueur is made from a delicious blend of Mexican Spices, serve these cupcakes at a Cinco de Mayo party. The boozy cupcakes would be fun to serve at a girls night, galentine’s day or bachelorette party. Or, bring these as dessert to an amazing dinner party. 

What piping tip should I use to decorate RumChata cupcakes? 

I like to use jumbo piping tips such as Wiltons 1M (star tip) or 2D tips when icing cupcakes. You can purchase these tips at most local craft stores. Buy them online here.

How can I decorate RumChata cupcakes?

Decorate RumChata cupcakes by using a piping bag and tip to icing cupcakes. Garnish them with pieces of cinnamon toast crunch cereal or sprinkle ground cinnamon toast cereal bits on top. You could also garnish with a straw cookie such as a Pirouline. 

Related

Looking for other sweet recipes like this? Try these:

  • Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
    Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)
  • A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
    Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)
  • Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip with apples, grapes, graham crackers, cookies and pumpkins
    Caramel Pumpkin Cream Cheese Dip (gingersnap dip)
  • Chewy Sea Salt Chocolate Chip Pie made in a cast iron skillet
    Sea Salt Chocolate Chip Cookie Pie

Pairing

In my opinion, coffee goes best with sweets! Try one of these unique coffee drinks:

  • Gorgeous Iced Pink Lattes with extra peaches, peach simple syrup and pink beetroot powder.
    Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder)
  • Hand reaching to try a delicious and classic espresso martini made with rum
    Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)
  • Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used as a coffee topping
    Peanut Butter Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping)
  • Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples
    Warm Apple Pie Latte
Print Recipe

The BEST Rumchata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix)

The BEST Rumchata Cupcakes (with Cake Mix) is a simple cupcake recipe that combines the sweet and creamy flavor of rumchata with a vanilla cake mix!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 18
Calories: 545kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Cupcake Tin
  • Cupcake Liners
  • Stand Mixer or Hand Mixer
  • Toothpick
  • Wire Cooling Rack
  • Piping Bag or Large Ziplock Bag
  • Piping Tips

Ingredients

  • 1 box White or Yellow Cake Mix
  • 1 cup Rumchata
  • 1 cup Unsalted Butter Melted
  • 3 Eggs at room temperature

RumChata Frosting

  • 4 cups Powdered Sugar
  • 2 cups Unsalted Butter
  • 1/4 cup RumChata
  • 1 tsp Vanilla
  • Pinch of Salt

Instructions

  • Begin by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Place cupcake liners inside cupcake pan and spray with cooking spray. 
  • To a large bowl or electric mixer, add cake mix, RumChata, eggs and melted butter. Mix at medium speed for 2 minutes or until mixture is combined.
  • Pour batter into cupcake tins filling about 2/3 of the way up.
  • Bake for 16-20 minutes until a toothpick is removed clean from the center of the cupcake.
  • Allow cupcakes to cool on a wire cooking rack.
  • Once cupcakes are completely cooled, use a piping bag to frost cupcakes. 

RumChata Frosting

  • Add butter to a stand mixer and mix for 2 minutes until butter is whipped and light.
  • To the butter, add 2 cups of powdered sugar, vanilla, and rumchata. Mix at medium speed until smooth. 
  • Add remaining 2 cups of powdered sugar and mix until incorporated.
  • Ice cooled cupcakes. Pipe frosting using a piping bag and a round tip. 

Nutrition

Serving: 18g | Calories: 545kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 21g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 109mg | Sodium: 224mg | Potassium: 34mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 985IU | Calcium: 74mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Dessert, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning

August 26, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

Reaching for a bite of salty and tangy Dill Pickle Popcorn

Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning is a savory popcorn treat perfect for the whole family! Make a homemade dill pickle seasoning mix and toss with popcorn for a fun snack! 

Dill Pickle Popcorn became all the rage after it was introduced at Trader Joe’s. At one point, Trader Joe’s even sold a ‘Seasoning in a Pickle’ seasoning blend. Now, stores such as Aldi have their own Dill Pickle Popcorn and potato chips. 

I love making simple snacks at home. This Dill Pickle Popcorn is the perfect snack to enjoy as the weather cools down and football parties begin. I can see this recipe becoming a movie night favorite! If you are looking for another popcorn snack, try this Jalapeno Popcorn with Parmesan Cheese! For a zesty option, try this Easy Spiced Mexican Popcorn using Taco Seasoning. If you want to be healthy, try this Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board.

Jump to:
  • Dill Pickle Popcorn Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to Make Dill Pickle Popcorn
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning

Dill Pickle Popcorn Details

​Flavor: Savory and salty! This tangy popcorn is reminiscent of a dill pickle (hence the name). This popcorn is salty with an earthy flavor. 

Time: Less than 10 minutes and this includes popping the popcorn! 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! The hardest part is popping the popcorn. I will teach you how to pop popcorn on the stovetop (once you try it, you won’t stop). If you are intimidated by cooking on the stovetop, microwave popcorn is an easy option! 

Ingredients

While the ingredient list may seem long, most of these are spices that you can find at your local grocery store. 

Dill Pickle Popcorn and Dill Seasoning Ingredients: popcorn kernels, vegetable oil, butter, pickle juice, salt, vinegar powder, garlic powder, onion powder, dill weed, dill seed, ground mustard and  ground coriander
  • Popcorn Kernels​: Alternatively, you could use pre-popped white popcorn or microwavable popcorn. 
  • Vegetable Oil: ​This is used for popping. Substitute a neutral cooking oil such as coconut oil. 
  • Butter: ​Use unsalted butter. If using salted butter, omit some of the salt in the seasoning. 
  • Pickle Juice: ​This gives the popcorn the true pickle flavor! 
  • Salt
  • Vinegar Powder: This fine powder is vinegar that has been fermented and dried down. Here is the vinegar powder that I use. 
  • Garlic Powder
  • Onion Powder
  • Dill Seed
  • Dill Weed
  • Ground Mustard
  • Ground Coriander 

How to Make Dill Pickle Popcorn

  1. Mix seasoning. ​Add all ingredients to a small bowl and stir to combine. Or, add all ingredients to a small food processor and pulse until combined. 
  2. Make Sauce. ​Microwave the butter to melt. Stir in pickle juice and the dill pickle seasoning. Set aside. 
  3. Make Popcorn. ​Place a pot on the oven over medium heat. Pour vegetable oil in bottom of pan and spread a thin layer of oil over the bottom of the pan. Add popcorn and place lid on top of popcorn. 
  4. Be Patient and Vigilant. ​Stay near popcorn and listen for the kernels to begin popping. This should take about 3 minutes to begin. Popcorn should pop for about 2 minutes. Popcorn is done popping when there is more than 2 seconds in between pops. 
  5. Mix popcorn. ​Remove popcorn from heat and pour butter mixture over top of popcorn. Stir to evenly coat sauce over top of all popcorn. 
  6. Enjoy! ​Enjoy popcorn while warm. 
Dill Pickle Seasoning mixed together. Ingredients include salt, vinegar powder, garlic powder, onion powder, ground mustard, ground coriander, dill weed and dill seed.

Mix Dill Pickle Seasoning together.

Make sauce by melting butter and stirring in pickle juice and dill pickle seasoning.

Pot coated with vegetable oil before popcorn kernels go in

Pour vegetable oil in the bottom of a pan to coat.

Popcorn kernels in a pot ready to pop on the stove.

Add popcorn kernels and cover with lid. Cook at medium heat until there is 2 seconds between pops.

A bowl of plain popped popcorn fresh off the stove.

Remove from heat and take off the lid. A few more kernels may continue to pop.

Pouring Dill Pickle Seasoning and butter mixture over top of plain popcorn

Pour Dill Pickle Seasoning over top of popcorn and stir to combine.

Variations

​Try these simple changes to add bigtime flavor to this Dill Pickle Popcorn Recipe! 

  • Spicy! ​Make this popcorn spicy by adding a pinch (or more) of crushed red pepper to the seasoning. 
  • Movie Style! ​Make this popcorn taste like you bought it at a movie stand by doubling the amount of butter (4 tablespoons instead of 2 tablespoons). Be sure to grab some napkins! 
  • Cheesy! ​Make your popcorn cheesy without adding actual cheese. Add a little nutritional yeast for a nutty, cheesy flavor. 

Equipment

​Nothing fancy is needed to make this homemade popcorn recipe! 

  • Small bowl
  • Medium to large pot with lid
  • Large bowl (if pot isn’t large enough to mix)
  • Microwavable bowl or measuring cup. I prefer a measuring cup as it is easier to pour the sauce. 

Storage

Popcorn is best enjoyed immediately. Store popcorn in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Top tip

​Do not leave your popcorn! When popping the popcorn, be sure to be vigilant. Popcorn can burn quickly and a few burnt kernels can ruin the whole batch. Stay in the kitchen while the popcorn pops and be sure to remove the popcorn from heat as soon as there is longer than 2 seconds between pops. 

FAQ

Can I use microwavable popcorn or store bought popcorn to make Dill Pickle Popcorn?

Yes, you can use microwavable popcorn or store bought popcorn to make Dill Pickle Popcorn. Keep in mind, microwavable popcorn and store bought popcorn can have added salt, butter or a different flavor than plain popped popcorn kernels. This can alter the taste of the popcorn. Be sure that you like the flavor of the popcorn and then add the butter dill seasoning mix and enjoy! 

Is Pickle Popcorn good?

​Yes, pickle popcorn is good! If you are a pickle lover, this popcorn will become one of your favorite snacks! The ingenious mix of spices makes for a tangy and savory handheld treat. I promise, you won’t be able to stop eating this popcorn! 

What is Pickle Popcorn?

Pickle popcorn is popcorn that tastes like a pickle! This popcorn recipe is a mix of tangy and savory flavors that coat plain popcorn with sweet butter! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A plate full of Honey Old Bay Wings served with the homemade honey old bay sauce and ranch dressing.
    Crispy Honey Old Bay Wings (Oven Baked)
  • A complete Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Board with all of the fixings including: red and green apple slices, brie cheese, cheddar cheese, caramel pumpkin dip, caramel sauce, peanut butter, pretzels, apple chips and reese's pieces candy
    Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board
  • A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
    Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)
  • Smokey Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, onions, cilantro and chips
    Smoky Mexican Bean Dip (Skillet Dip)

Pairing

These are my favorite drinks to serve with salty snacks:

  • Spiked Cranberry Lemonade, a refreshing whiskey and vodka cocktail similar to Fisher's Island Lemonade
    Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)
  • Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim
    Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup
  • Refreshing Cucumber Cocktail with Mint and Lime
    Refreshing Cucumber Cocktail (with Mint and Lime)
  • Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
    Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)

A bowl of pickle popcorn sits next to a glass of beer and a plate with pickle spears, all arranged on a checkered tablecloth.
Print Recipe

Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning

Easy Dill Pickle Popcorn with Homemade Seasoning is a savory popcorn treat perfect for the whole family! Make a homemade dill pickle seasoning mix and toss with popcorn for a fun  snack! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 153kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Small Bowl to mix seasoning
  • Microwavable Measuring Cup
  • Medium to Large Pot with lid to pop popcorn
  • Mixing Bowl Optional

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp Vegetable Oil
  • 1/4 cup Yellow Popcorn Kernels uncooked
  • 1 tbsp Pickle Juice
  • 2 tbsp Unsalted Butter

Dill Pickle Seasoning

  • 1 tsp Salt
  • 1/2 tsp Vinegar Powder
  • 1/2 tsp Onion Powder
  • 1/2 tsp Garlic Powder
  • 1/4 tsp Dill Seed
  • 1/4 tsp Dill Weed
  • 1/4 tsp Ground Mustard
  • 1/4 tsp Ground Coriander

Instructions

  • Melt butter in microwave. Add pickle juice and dill pickle seasoning to melted butter and stir.
  • Place a medium sized pot on the stove at medium heat. Pour vegetable oil into pot and move pot around so that the oil covers the pan.
  • Add popcorn kernels and cover with a lid.
  • Watch popcorn closely as it begins to pop. Popcorn is done popping when no kernels pop for 2 seconds.
  • Remove from heat. Pour butter mixture over top of popcorn and stir to cover all kernels.

Dill Pickle Seasoning

  • Add all ingredients to a small bowl. Stir to mix all ingredients.

Nutrition

Serving: 4g | Calories: 153kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 642mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 176IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 7mg | Iron: 0.4mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes

Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board

August 14, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 10 Comments

A complete Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Board with all of the fixings including: red and green apple slices, brie cheese, cheddar cheese, caramel pumpkin dip, caramel sauce, peanut butter, pretzels, apple chips and reese's pieces candy

Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board is a charcuterie board and dessert board combined highlighting the best of fall produce: apples! 

It’s (almost) fall y’all and everyone you know will soon be heading to their local apple orchard (Delaware locals, Fifers is the best!). If you are unsure of what to make with all of those apples, try something less traditional than an apple pie! A Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board.

If you are looking for another apple recipe to try, try these 3 Ingredient Apple Muffins. They are the perfect on the go breakfast.

Jump to:
  • Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to Build a Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board

Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board Details

Flavor: Sweet and Savory! This board has sweet elements (apples and caramel dip to name a few) and savory (rich cheese and salty pretzels). 

Time: Build this Caramel Apple Board in 10 minutes or less, perfect for your next party! 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! Gather the ingredients, slice the apples and arrange on a charcuterie board.

Ingredients

What you like on your board is a personal preference. Use the below suggestions for your next board. 

  • Apples: I like to use a mix of red and green sliced apples such as granny smith apples and gala apples. 
  • Caramel Sauce: Store bought caramel sauce works here! Feel free to warm the sauce before serving so that it is better for dipping apple wedges. 
  • Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip: It is always nice to include a homemade recipe on a dessert charcuterie board and this cream cheese mixture could not be easier to make. I have linked this recipe. Feel free to use your favorite sweet dip! 
  • Caramel Candies
  • Festive fall candies such as Reese’s Pieces or Candy Corn. 
  • Pretzels
  • Cheese: I like to include a hard cheese and a soft cheese such as a sharp cheddar and a brie. 
  • Apple Chips
  • Peanut Butter: What goes better than apple and peanut butter?
  • Garnish: add a pop of color with a garnish! You could use fresh rosemary or thyme sprigs. You also could use orange or red fall leaves (cleaned) or purchase artificial leaves. 
  • Lemon Juice: To prevent apples from browning.

How to Build a Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board

Building a charcuterie board could not be easier. Use these simple steps to build a board that will impress everyone at this years Halloween party! 

  1. Start by choosing a large board. This board can be rectangular or circular. Just make sure it is large enough to accommodate the number of guests you will be serving. 
  2. Garnish the board with fresh herbs or colorful leaves. 
  3. Next, add the ingredients that you will be serving in a small bowl. Most dips such as the caramel sauce, Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip and peanut butter will be put in a bowl. Put these smaller bowls onto the board. Space these bowls on the board. 
  4. Then, add the apple slices and apple wedges. Thinly slice the apples and fan the apples onto the board for a classic appearance. 
  5. Next, add the cheeses. If the cheese is sliced, arrange or stack the cheese to add some texture and height to the board. 
  6. Finally, fill in the empty space with the remaining ingredients such as the apple chips, pretzels and candy. 
Thyme and Rosemary Sprigs on a large circular board. The beginning of a delicious Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Board.

Add garnishes to the board for a beautiful pop of color.

Peanut Butter, Caramel Pumpkin Dip and Caramel Sauce in small bowls to be served with apple slices

Add ingredients that will be served in bowls such as peanut butter, apple dip and caramel sauce.

Red and green apples thinly sliced in piles on the caramel apple board

Arrange the apples on the board.

Brie and cheddar cheese added to the Caramel Apple Board

Add the cheeses.

Equipment

Basic kitchen equipment is required for this board. 

  • Cutting Board
  • Paring Knife or Apple Slicer
  • Large Board
  • Small bowls 

Storage

Store all Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board ingredients in separate containers. Any leftover apples can be tossed with additional lemon juice and stored refrigerated in an airtight container or plastic bag with air removed. The caramel dip, Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip and cheeses should be stored in the refrigerator. 

Top tip


Use lemon juice or sprite on your apples! You don’t want to have brown apples on your board. After slicing a variety of apples, toss with lemon juice or sprite. Blot any remaining lemon juice off of the apples before placing on the board. 

FAQ


What goes with apples on a charcuterie board? 

There are many types of foods that compliment apples on a charcuterie board. As seen with traditional caramel apples, sweet toppings such as caramel and melted chocolate go with apples. Savory ingredients such as pretzels, cheese and nuts also go well with apples and are a great addition to this snack board. 

What types of apples should be used on apple charcuterie boards? 

An apple charcuterie board should include a few kind of apples. I like to always include a red and a green apple. Granny Smith Apples should be included since this is the type of apple that traditional candy apples are made with. The tartness of the granny smith pairs with the sweetness of the caramel sauce. Include a crispy apple such as a Gala Apple or a Pink Lady. If you have room on your board, include a yellow apple variety such as a Golden Delicious. 

What cheese goes best with apples? 

Cheeses that go well with apples include Gouda, Cheddar, Brie, Camembert or a Cream Cheese Dip. Pairing apples with cheese is the perfect mix of sweet and savory. 

How can I prevent my apples from browning? 


Prevent apples from browning by tossing the apples with lemon juice or sprite before serving. This extra step will keep the star of the show from looking drab! 

What can I do with leftovers from my apple charcuterie board? 

If you are lucky enough to have leftovers from an apple charcuterie board, use them to make caramel apple nachos! Simply, arrange the apples on a plate. Top the apples with caramel sauce or your favorite caramel apple dip. Then, add caramel apple toppings such as chocolate chips, nuts, shredded coconut and crushed pretzels. Finally, add a drizzle of chocolate or peanut butter sauce. 


When can I serve a Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board? 

The fall season is the perfect opportunity to serve a Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board! Serve the board at fall parties, Halloween parties, football game parties, movie nights, family gatherings or a girls night. This board is a fun way to highlight the best fall produce and flavors. 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A plate full of Honey Old Bay Wings served with the homemade honey old bay sauce and ranch dressing.
    Crispy Honey Old Bay Wings (Oven Baked)
  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam
    Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam
  • Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers covered in sauce with celery and ranch sauce
    Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers

Pairing

These are my favorite drinks to serve with charcuterie boards:

  • Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
    Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)
  • Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples
    Warm Apple Pie Latte
  • Two elegantly carved glass tumblers filled with a golden-orange fall cocktail, garnished with apple slices and cinnamon sticks. The glasses have sugar rims, and there are apple slices, a lemon, and a cinnamon stick on the wooden surface.
    Spiced Chai Cider Bourbon (4 Ingredient Cocktail)
  • Two glass mugs of hot apple cider garnished with orange slices rest on a wooden board. Oranges are in a glass container in the background, beside a bottle and cinnamon sticks, enhancing the cozy atmosphere. A striped cloth is nearby.
    Chai Spiced Apple Cider (Easy Crockpot Recipe)
A round wooden board showcasing a caramel apple charcuterie delight with sliced apples, cheese, caramel, pretzels, peanut butter, candy-coated chocolates, and dried apple chips. The vibrant arrangement is beautifully enhanced by rosemary sprigs.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board

Sweet and Savory Caramel Apple Charcuterie Board is a charcuterie board and dessert board combined highlighting the best of fall produce: apples! 
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Cutting Board
  • Paring Knife or Apple Slicer
  • Large Board
  • Small Bowls

Ingredients

  • 2-3 Large Apples red and green
  • Caramel Sauce
  • Fruit Dip Such as Caramel Pumpkin Pie Dip
  • Peanut Butter
  • Cheeses hard and soft
  • Caramel Candy
  • Salty Snacks Chips or Pretzels
  • Sweet Snacks Apple Chips
  • Thyme and Rosemary Sprigs to garnish
  • Lemon Juice

Instructions

  • Begin by adding the rosemary and thyme sprigs to a large serving board.
  • Next, add any food that will be served in bowls such as sauces or small candies.
  • Then, add the apple slices and wedges.
  • Add the cheese blocks/slices.
  • In the remaining open areas, add the pretzels, chips, candies, etc.

Notes

Don’t forget to add lemon juice to the apple slices to prevent browning. 

Filed Under: Appetizer, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)

August 11, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples

Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe) are the easiest and most delicious muffins! Perfect for fall, they combine a box cake mix with two other ingredients and come together in less than 30 minutes! What can be better?! 

With summer winding down and school beginning, everyone is searching for simple recipes. These Cinnamon Apple Muffins are the answer to your breakfast woes. They are soft, full of fall flavor and healthy. You won’t feel guilty at all giving your kiddo one of these as they walk to the bus stop. 

Looking for another make ahead breakfast? Try this Toasted Coconut Granola. Put on top of Greek yogurt with fresh fruit and you have a high protein and delicious breakfast. Or, make this Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas). Make it on a Sunday and serve slices of baked oatmeal all week for breakfast. If you need a delicious fall drink, try this Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte!

Jump to:
  • Apple Muffin Details
  • Ingredients & Substitutions
  • Step-by-Step Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)

Apple Muffin Details

Flavor: These muffins taste like fall! The box of spice cake mix gives warm flavors of cinnamon, nutmeg, ginger and cloves. The apples makes these muffins a sweet treat! 

Time: Including bake time, these muffins come together in 30 minutes. 

Level of Difficulty: Easy! If you can work a stand mixer and a food processor, you can make these muffins! 

Ingredients & Substitutions

With just 3 simple ingredients and an optional cinnamon sugar topping, head to the store now! 

  • Spice Cake Mix: I use the Betty Crocker ‘Super Moist’ box mix. However, I would recommend using a spice cake mix instead of a yellow or white cake mix as the spice cake mix has the spices that compliment the apples. 
  • Unsweetened Applesauce: For extra flavor, use cinnamon applesauce. 
  • Apple Pie Filling: This gives the muffins their sweet apple flavor. 
  • Cinnamon Sugar Topping: Optional. This topping gives the apple muffins a little more sweetness and the mixtures acts as ‘icing on the cake!

Step-by-Step Instructions

Apple Pie Filling in food processor

Step 1: Place the apple pie filling in a food processor and finely chop the apples to form a fruit puree.

Step 2: Add the spice cake mix, apple pie filling, and applesauce to a stand mixer. Mix for 2 minutes, scraping the bowl once, until all ingredients are fully combined. 

Step 3: Place 1/3 cup of muffin batter into muffin cups (about 3/4 full). Bake for 20 minutes.

Cinnamon and Sugar Mix to go on top of apple muffins

Step 4 (Optional): While the muffins are still warm, dip the tops into cinnamon sugar.

Variations

  • To make a weight watchers apple pie muffin, use chopped apples in place of apple pie filling. Chop 1 large apple and add directly into the muffin mix. Mix slowly to incorporate ingredients. 
  • Make these muffins a dessert by adding cream cheese frosting. 
  • Save time and bake these muffins in a 9×13 or bundt pan.
  • To add a little ‘extra’ to the muffins, add chocolate chips! This is my secret to getting my toddlers to eat anything! 

Equipment

No fancy equipment here! 

  • Food Processor: If you don’t have a food processor, finely chop the apple pieces from the apple pie filling. You also can keep the apple pieces whole. 
  • Stand Mixer: You could use a large mixing bowl and mix by hand. 
  • Muffin Pan: You could also use a mini muffin tin or 9×13 pan. Just don’t forget to adjust the cooking times. 
  • Muffin Liners 

Storage

Store muffins refrigerated in an airtight container for up to a week. I like to reheat my muffin in the microwave for 10-20 seconds before enjoying.

Top tip

If pureeing the apple pie filling in the food processor, scrape the sides a few times to make sure that all apples are chopped. Whole apples can get stuck on the sides or bottom of the food processor.

Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins on a plate with extra muffins, apples and cinnamon

FAQ

What kind of apples should I use in these apple muffins? 

If choosing to use apples instead of apple pie filling, I like to use gala apples, granny smith apples or honeycrisp apples. Crisp apples are great to use because they keep their texture while baking. Core, peel and dice apple up before mixing with the dry ingredients. 

How should I serve these apple muffins? 

Serve these healthy apple muffins warm with a smear of apple butter for a quick breakfast. I also like to enjoy mine with a bowl of greek yogurt and add the muffin into the yogurt. Apple muffins make a great addition to a breakfast board or brunch spread. 

Do I have to use muffin liners? 

I recommend using muffin liners with these Cinnamon Sugar Apple Muffins. The apple pie filling makes these muffins heavy. Using the liner makes sure that the sides and bottom of the muffin do not stick to the pan. 

Related

Looking for other simple breakfast recipes? Try these:

  • Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) on plates with extra peaches and milk
    Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas!)
  • Green Spinach Pancakes in a stack with whipped ceram
    Healthy Green Pancakes (with spinach and Greek yogurt)
  • Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples
    Warm Apple Pie Latte
  • Toasted Coconut Granola in a mason jar with blueberries and greek yogurt
    Toasted Coconut Granola

Pairing

These are my favorite morning drinks to pair with Cinnamon Sugar Apple Muffins!

  • Glass of Iced Matcha Chai with a straw
    Matcha Chai Tea Latte with Chai Simple Syrup
  • Gorgeous Iced Pink Lattes with extra peaches, peach simple syrup and pink beetroot powder.
    Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder)
  • Maple Pecan Coffee made with Cold Brew, Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and cinnamon sticks
    Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew
  • Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used as a coffee topping
    Peanut Butter Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping)
Three Ingredient Apple Spice Muffins stacked in a tower of three with apple slices and whole apples
Print Recipe

Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe)

Cinnamon Sugar Apple Spice Muffins (3 Ingredient Recipe) are the easiest and most delicious muffins! Perfect for fall, they combine a box cake mix with two other ingredients and come together in less than 30 minutes! What can be better?! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast, Brunch, Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 18
Calories: 151kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Stand Mixer or Large Mixing Bowl
  • Muffin Pan
  • Muffin Liners

Ingredients

  • 1 Spice Box Cake Mix
  • 1 1/2 cups Apple Pie Filling
  • 1 cup Applesauce
  • Cinnamon Sugar Optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 Fahrenheit. Line a muffin pan with muffin liners and spray with cooking spray.
  • Add Apple Pie Filling to a food processor. Run on high for 1 minute to form an apple puree.
  • Add the spice cake mix, apple pie filling and applesauce to a stand mixer. Mix for 2 minutes, scraping the bowl once, until all ingredients are fully combined. 
  • Place 1/3 cup of muffin batter into muffin cups (about 3/4 full). 
  • Bake in a preheated oven for 20 minutes until a toothpick comes out of the center of a muffin clean. Let cool in pan for 2 minutes.
  • Optional, while muffins are still warm, place cinnamon sugar topping into a small bowl. Dip the tops of each muffin into cinnamon sugar mixture. Let cool on a wire rack. 

Nutrition

Serving: 18g | Calories: 151kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 198mg | Potassium: 117mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Breakfast, Dessert, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)

August 7, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish

Blackberry Old Fashioned (a bourbon cocktail) is a classic drink with a sweet twist! With a dark color, this is the perfect spooky Halloween spirit. 

As soon as the weather turns cool, whiskey lovers (including myself) get excited for the sweet and spicy flavor of an Old Fashioned. Pair an Old Fashioned with blackberries and you have a festive cocktail for a cooler time of year. 

If you are looking for another classic cocktail, try this Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum) or this Spiked Apple Cider. Both recipes are simple and perfect for Halloween parties. 

Jump to:
  • Blackberry Old Fashioned Details
  • Ingredients & Substitutions
  • How to make a Blackberry Old Fashioned
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)

Blackberry Old Fashioned Details

Flavor: Sweet! The homemade Peach Simple Syrup balances out the spiciness of the bourbon. 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! If you can use a cocktail shaker, you can make this recipe! You do have to make the homemade simple syrup but that is also easy and can be prepared ahead of time. 

Time: Less than 5 minutes! Just make sure that you prepare the Peach Simple Syrup ahead of time so that you shake up this perfect cocktail in no time! 

Ingredients & Substitutions

No fancy ingredients are required to whip up this Blackberry Old Fashioned!

  • Bourbon: This is a classic ingredient in an Old Fashioned! If you don’t have bourbon on hand, you can substitute a rye whiskey. 
  • Peach Simple Syrup: The peach flavor adds a sweetness to the semi tart blackberry flavor. 
  • Blackberries: I recommend using fresh blackberries.
  • Orange Bitters: If you do not have orange bitters on hand, substitute traditional angostura bitters. You could substitute a squeeze of orange juice or a drop of orange liqueur. 

How to make a Blackberry Old Fashioned

  1. Start by making the Peach Simple Syrup. Making homemade simple syrup is as simple as it sounds! Add a chopped peach, white sugar, water and cinnamon sticks to pot over medium high heat. Stir until the sugar is dissolved. Bring to a boil for 1 minute. Remove pot from heat. Let syrup cool and thicken for 20-30 minutes. 
  2. Muddle and Strain the Blackberries. Add blackberries to a tall mixing glass. Muddle the blackberries to allow them to release their juice. Place a strainer over top of a clean glass or mixing cup. Using a spoon, press down on blackberries to release all juice into clean glass. If needed, double strain. Discard blackberry pulp. 
  3. Shake up the cocktail! To an iced cocktail shaker, add blackberry juice, bourbon, Peach Simple Syrup and bitters. Shake vigorously for 20-30 seconds until the outside of the shaker is cold and icy. 
  4. Pour cocktail. Pour Blackberry Old Fashioned into a rocks glass over a large ice cube. 
  5. Garnish (optional). Use a fun garnish such as an orange peel, orange slices or peach slices. 

Variations

While these variations will not make a traditional Old Fashioned, they still will make a delicious and tasty cocktail! 

  • Use Brandy. Peach or Apple Brandy would be an excellent substitute for bourbon. 
  • Use Cinnamon Whiskey to make a cozy cocktail. 
  • Sweeten with Maple Syrup or Honey Syrup in place of the Peach Simple Syrup. 
  • Make a large batch of witches brew! To make a spooky drink, leave some small chunks of blackberries in the punch and place plastic spiders on the outside of the punch bowl. 

Equipment

Standard mixology equipment is required! 

  • Cutting Board
  • Knife: To slice the peach. 
  • Pot
  • Muddler: If you don’t have a muddler, you could use a wooden spoon to mash the berries. 
  • Strainer 
  • Cocktail Shaker 
  • Whiskey Glass 

Storage

If preparing this Blackberry Old Fashioned in advance, add all ingredients to the cocktail shaker. Do not add ice! Store refrigerated until ready to serve. Once ready to serve, add ice to the cocktail and shake the cocktail up! 

The Peach Simple Syrup can be stored in the refrigerator for up to a month. Looking for another recipe to use the Peach Simple Syrup? Try this Iced Pink Latte (with Beetroot Powder). The Peach Simple Syrup gives a sweet kick to an original and earthy breakfast drink! 

Top tip

Be sure to remove all of the blackberry pulp! If not, the blackberry pulp and seeds will get stuck in your teeth (which could be perfect for halloween festivities, just kidding!). Start by muddling the blackberries to release all of the juices. Then, place the blackberries into a strainer over top of a glass. Press down on the blackberries to release all fruit juices. If needed, strain again. 

FAQ

Does an Old Fashioned have muddled fruit? 

A traditional Old Fashioned does not have muddled fruit. Lemon slices, orange slices and sugar cubes are used. However, to make this drink blackberry flavor, we muddle the blackberries. 

How can you muddle berries without a muddler? 

If you don’t have a muddler, don’t worry! Simply use a spoon to press down on the fruit to release all of the juices. 

What mixes well with bourbon whiskey? 

Bourbon whiskey mixes well with vermouth (to make a Manhattan), ginger beer, fresh lemon juice, ginger ale, mint and hard apple cider to name a few! 

How should I garish a Blackberry Old Fashioned? 

Garnishing a Blackberry Old Fashioned is simple! What better way than to place an entire blackberry on a cocktail skewer. You could also add mint or rosemary leaves, a fresh orange slice or a peach slice. 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Two Spicy Lemon Margaritas on a serving board with extra lemons, whole jalapenos and lemonade
    Spicy Lemon Margarita Recipe (with Jalapeno Tequila)
  • Hand reaching to try a delicious and classic espresso martini made with rum
    Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)
  • Peach Strawberry Sangria with Rose Wine in a pitcher with wine glasses full of delicious peach sangria
    Simple Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine
  • Spiked Cranberry Lemonade, a refreshing whiskey and vodka cocktail similar to Fisher's Island Lemonade
    Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with a cocktail:

  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam
    Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam
  • A plate full of Honey Old Bay Wings served with the homemade honey old bay sauce and ranch dressing.
    Crispy Honey Old Bay Wings (Oven Baked)
  • Easy, Everyday, Baked Meatballs in a serving bowl garnished with parmesan, basil and tomato sauce
    Oven Baked Venison Meatballs (Easy and Tasty Recipe)
Blackberry Old Fashioned in a rocks glass with blackberry garnish
Print Recipe

Blackberry Old Fashioned (easy bourbon cocktail)

Blackberry Old Fashioned (a bourbon cocktail) is a classic drink with a sweet twist! With a dark color, this is the perfect spooky Halloween spirit. 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 220kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Muddler
  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Whiskey Glass

Ingredients

  • 2 oz Bourbon
  • 4 Blackberries Muddled and Strained
  • 1 oz Peach Simple Syrup
  • 2 dashes Orange Bitters

Peach Simple Syrup

  • 1 Peach Diced
  • 1 cup White Sugar
  • 1 cup Water
  • 2 Cinnamon Sticks

Instructions

  • Add all ingredients to a cocktail shaker with ice.
  • Shake vigorously for 30 seconds until the cocktail shaker becomes cold and icy.
  • Pour into a whiskey glass over ice. Garnish with extra cinnamon sticks.

Peach Simple Syrup

  • Add all ingredients to a pot over medium heat.
  • Stir until sugar dissolves.
  • Bring to a boil. Boil for 1 minute. Remove from heat.
  • Let syrup sit and cool for 20 minutes. Syrup will thicken.
  • Once syrup has come to room temperature, store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 220kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.04g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 17mg | Potassium: 32mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 17IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 6mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder)

August 3, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

Gorgeous Iced Pink Lattes with extra peaches, peach simple syrup and pink beetroot powder.

Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder) is a healthy, caffeinated drink sweetened with a homemade Peach Simple Syrup! Change up your morning coffee routine and try one of these superfood lattes! 

Summer is in full swing and iced lattes seem to be the only thing that anyone orders at a coffee shop. Switch things up and try a Pink Latte at home! The gorgeous color and the healthy ingredients will make this latte your new favorite drink. 

Need a breakfast dish to pair with this latte? Try this Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) for a perfect summer breakfast! If you want another fun and colorful iced latte, try this Iced Matcha Chai Latte!

Jump to:
  • Pink Latte Details
  • Pink Latte Ingredients
  • Let’s Get Cookin’!
  • Substitutions
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder)

Pink Latte Details

Flavor: This Pink Latte tastes sweet! Although beets have a natural sweetness, the earthiness of the vegetable can take away from the sweetness. This is why I pair the beet flavor with a homemade peach simple syrup! You can still taste the beets in this latte but they lose their earthiness and grittiness when paired with peach. 

Time: 5 minutes! Just be sure to have your espresso and Peach Simple Syrup prepared ahead of time.

Level of Difficulty: ​Simple! 

Pink Latte Ingredients

Make a Pink Latte at home with just 4 simple ingredients! 

  • Beetroot Powder: This powder gives the latte the bright pink colors as well as the nutritional boost! Find this powder at your local health food store or purchase online. I use Kale Naturals Beetroot Powder. Buy it here!
  • Peach Simple Syrup: The sweet taste of this simple syrup balances out the sharp and earthy taste of beets. I will teach you how to make this simple syrup! 
  • Espresso: If you don’t have an espresso machine, don’t worry! You can make this latte using cold brew coffee or strongly brewed coffee. 
  • Milk: Choose your favorite milk! Almond milk, coconut milk and plain oat milk are all delicious in this Pink Latte! 

Let’s Get Cookin’!

1. Begin by brewing espresso. Allow time for espresso to cool.

2. Prepare Peach Simple Syrup. This can be done ahead of time. Add diced peaches, sugar, water and cinnamon sticks to a pot over medium heat. Turn heat to medium high. Stir together until sugar dissolves. Bring to a boil. Let boil for 1 minute. Turn heat off and let the syrup sit and thicken for about 20 minutes. Let syrup come to room temperature before using. 

3. Make latte. Add milk and beetroot powder to a liquid measuring cup or large cup. Using a whisk, stir vigorously until all of the powder is dissolved in milk. Pour half of the milk into a glass with ice. Add Peach Simple Syrup to beet mixture and stir to combine. Using a milk frother, froth remaining milk for about 20 seconds until milk is foamy. Pour frothed milk over top of beet mixture. Top with espresso. 

Substitutions

As written, this Beet Powder Latte is vegan. If trying to follow a vegan lifestyle, remember to use a plant-based milk. Here are some simple substitutions for the latte ingredients:

  • Beetroot Powder: use fresh beetroot juice mixed with milk in place of beetroot powder.
  • Peach Simple Syrup: use regular simple syrup, vanilla extract or maple syrup to give the latte a touch of sweetener. 
  • Milk: use your choice of milk! It can be dairy or non-dairy.
  • Espresso: use cold brew coffee or strongly brewed coffee. Or, mix things add up and add an extra shot of espresso!

Equipment

  • Large Mixing Cup: I prefer to use this because I find that I need a large base to whisk the beetroot powder with the milk. A cup with a large base would also work. 
  • Whisk 
  • Handheld Frother
  • Large Glass

Storage

This Pink Latte is best consumed immediately after making. I do not recommend saving the latte for later. However, you can prepare the espresso and Peach Simple Syrup ahead of time and refrigerate until ready to drink. 

Top tip

Vigorously whisk the beetroot powder with the milk. All of the powder should be fully dissolved. It is not a pleasant taste when there is a chunk of beetroot powder in a gorgeous latte. 

FAQ

What is Beetroot Powder?

Beetroot powder is dehydrated beets that have been grinded down into a concentrated powder form. One teaspoon of beetroot powder is the nutritional equivalent to eating one beet! 

What are the health benefits of a Beetroot Latte?

Beets are a nutritional powerhouse! Consuming beets increases blood flow and oxygen to the body. In turn, this boosts physical performance and stamina. Beets help athletes perform better for a longer period of time. Additionally, beets fight inflammation, contain high fiber and potassium (more than a banana) and supports brain health. Beets are a low calorie, nutritionally dense vegetable. 

Is a Pink Beetroot Latte good for you?

Yes, a Pink Latte is good for you! Beetroot powder has many health benefits such as increased athletic performance, boosting your immune system and anti-inflammatory properties. 

Can this latte be made hot?

Yes, this latte can be made into a hot, classic latte! Simply, warm the milk on the stove over medium heat or microwave the milk to your desired temperature. Then, whisk the beetroot powder into warm milk. Combine the remaining ingredients and enjoy! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A delicious Peppermint Mocha Latte with Christmas cookies, red flowers and coffee beans
    Peppermint Mocha Latte with Peppermint Simple Syrup
  • Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples
    Warm Apple Pie Latte
  • Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used as a coffee topping
    Peanut Butter Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping)
  • Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim
    Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

Pairing

These are my favorite breakfast dishes to serve with lattes:

  • Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) on plates with extra peaches and milk
    Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas!)
  • Slice of Ricotta Quiche with mushrooms and spinach on serving knife.
    Creamy Spinach Mushroom Quiche with Ricotta Cheese
  • Toasted Coconut Granola in a mason jar with blueberries and greek yogurt
    Toasted Coconut Granola
  • A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
    Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder)

Iced Pink Latte Recipe (using Beetroot Powder) is a healthy, caffeinated drink sweetened with a homemade Peach Simple Syrup! Change up your morning coffee routine and try one of these superfood lattes! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast, Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 196kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large Liquid Mixing Cup
  • Whisk
  • Handheld Frother
  • Tall Glass for serving

Ingredients

  • 1/2 tsp Beetroot Powder
  • 2 tbsp Peach Simple Syrup
  • 1 cup Milk of Choice
  • 2 oz Espresso

Peach Simple Syrup

  • 1 Peach Diced
  • 2 Cinnamon Sticks
  • 1 cup White Sugar
  • 1 cup Water

Instructions

  • Add milk and beetroot powder to a large mixing cup. Whisk the beetroot powder into the milk and fully dissolved. Pour half of the milk into a glass and mix in Peach Simple Syrup. Add ice to the glass.
  • Using a handheld frother, froth remaining milk. Pour frothed milk over top into glass.
  • Top milk with espresso. Enjoy!

Peach Simple Syrup

  • Add all ingredients to a pot over medium heat.
  • Stir until sugar dissolves.
  • Bring to a boil. Boil for 1 minute. Remove from heat.
  • Allow syrup to sit and thicken for 20-30 minutes.
  • Once syrup has come to room temperature, store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 132mg | Potassium: 500mg | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 500IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 330mg | Iron: 2mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Recipes

Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free)

July 26, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 4 Comments

Gluten Free Chicken Salad on Lettuce Wraps with Red Grapes

Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) is the ultimate chicken salad recipe! Made with simple ingredients and pantry staples, this creamy chicken salad recipe is a perfect light dinner or weekday lunch! 

Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) in lettuce cups on a serving platter with grapes.

My secret ingredient in this chicken salad is….TARRAGON! This herb is slightly spicy and citrusy and goes a long way in chicken salad. 

Chicken salad is the perfect big batch recipe to prepare ahead of time and serve for large gatherings such as birthday parties or bridal showers. If you are looking for another simple recipe to serve for large crowds, try this Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad.  Made with plenty of fresh herbs, this pasta salad holds up well and tastes better the next day. Or, try this Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables for a recipe that everyone will love! 

Jump to:
  • Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) Details 
  • Ingredients/Substitutions
  • Instructions
  • How to Serve
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free)

Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) Details 

Flavor: ​This chicken salad has a slightly tangy flavor thanks to the herbs and mustard. The creamy dressing gives the chicken salad a smooth texture. 

Time: ​You can make this chicken salad in about 15 minutes (not including the time to cook the chicken). 

Level of Difficulty: ​Super Simple! A little shredding, chopping and mixing, and you will have a delicious chicken salad recipe to enjoy! 

Ingredients/Substitutions

​This Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) recipe comes together with basic, everyday ingredients. No need to run to multiple grocery stores looking for fancy ingredients. Check out your refrigerator and pantry to find these ingredients or substitutions. 

Chicken Salad Ingredients: shredded chicken breast, mayonnaise, celery, red onion, salt, pepper, Dijon mustard, tarragon, chives and thyme.
  • Shredded Chicken: I prefer to use boneless skinless chicken breasts. You could use chicken thighs or chicken tenders. Or, you could even use store-bought rotisserie chicken to make this really easy. I will teach you how to get the most perfect shredded chicken in this post!
  • Celery Stalks: Fresh, crisp celery tastes best in this easy chicken salad recipe. 
  • Red Onion
  • Salt
  • Black Pepper
  • Mayonnaise: Duke’s Mayo is my favorite and it is naturally gluten free. Make sure that the mayo you use is gluten free. You can also substitute Greek yogurt or sour cream (I don’t recommend using all sour cream. Use 50% sour cream, 50% mayo). 
  • Mustard: I prefer to use a spicy brown mustard or a Dijon mustard in this recipe for extra flavor. 
  • Fresh Tarragon, Chives and Thyme: I find that fresh herbs give the best taste. If you don’t have these exact herbs, substitute in herbs that you like such as fresh parsley or fresh dill. 
  • Fresh Lemon Juice 

Instructions

Let’s Get Cookin’!

  1. Make the Chicken. ​My favorite way to make the chicken is to use boneless chicken breasts and cook them in the crockpot. Season both sides of the chicken breast with salt and pepper. Pour about 1/4 cup of chicken broth into the crockpot. Cook on low for 4 hours until chicken is cooked through. If you are using leftover rotisserie chicken, you can skip this step. 
  2. Shred the Chicken. ​You can shred the chicken with a fork and a knife when the chicken is at room temperature. Or, use this time saving trick! While the chicken is still warm, place the chicken in the bowl of your stand mixer. Mix chicken using the paddle attachment on low speed for about a minute until chicken is thinly shredded. 
  3. Mix the ingredients. ​Place chicken in a large mixing bowl. If you shredded the chicken using the mixer, the chicken can stay in that bowl. Add the celery, red onion, mayonnaise, mustard, lemon juice, tarragon, chives and thyme. Stir together. Taste to add seasoning or additional mayonnaise or mustard. You don’t want the chicken salad to be dry. 
Chicken breasts in crock pot seasoned with salt and pepper

Add chicken to a crockpot. Season with salt and pepper. Pour 1/4 cup chicken broth in bottom of pot. Cook on low for 2- 4 hours until chicken is cooked through.

Cooked chicken breast in a stand mixer ready to be shredded.

Shred chicken in stand mixer.

All ingredients for Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) in a large mixing bowl prior to mixing

Mix all ingredients together in a large mixing bowl.

How to Serve

 This recipe is naturally gluten free. To keep it gluten free, try serving the chicken salad: 

  • In Butter Lettuce Cups: Think of these lettuce cups as mini wraps for your chicken salad!
  • Over a Salad: Grab all of the your favorite salad ingredients such as romaine lettuce, crunchy veggies, dried fruit and nuts to make a delicious salad! 
  • As a chicken salad sandwiches: ​To keep this recipe gluten free, be sure to grab your favorite gluten-free bread. Serve with lettuce and tomato! 
  • Serve for a crowd: ​Serve this homemade chicken salad to feed a crowd. Have a tray of lettuce wraps, a tray of croissants or buns and the chicken salad. Let guests choose how to eat their chicken salad. Pasta salads and potato chips pair perfectly! 
Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) in a serving bowl with a spoon. Red grapes, lettuce and tomato are next to serving bowl to be served with the chicken salad.

Variations

Make it healthier: ​substitute plain Greek yogurt in place of the mayonnaise. 

Make a Maryland version: ​season with Old Bay! A Chesapeake tradition! 

Make a deluxe chicken salad: add in sliced red grapes or green grapes, slivered almonds, green onions and/or dried cranberries to make a filling and tasty chicken salad! 

Equipment

​No fancy equipment is needed to make this chicken salad! 

  • Crockpot ​(if not using leftover chicken or rotisserie chicken)
  • Stand Mixer with Paddle Attachment (to shred chicken)
  • Large Bowl
  • Large Spoon or Spatula 
  • Airtight Container ​(for storage) 

Storage

​Store this Classic Chicken Salad refrigerated in an airtight container. Enjoy this chicken salad within 3-4 days of making. You can prepare this recipe the day before. Be sure to stir chicken salad before serving. Add additional mayo and/or seasonings if needed. 

Top tip

​Use a stand mixer to shred the chicken! It is the easiest way to get thinly sliced chicken pieces that mixes perfectly with the other ingredients. Plus, you won’t burn or cut yourself while cutting the chicken. 

FAQ

Does chicken salad contain gluten? 

No, most chicken salad is naturally gluten-free. However, be sure to check the ingredients, what is mixed in the chicken salad and what the chicken salad is served with before consuming. 

What can I put in chicken salad besides bread? 

Serve chicken salad on gluten-free crackers, in a butter lettuce cup or on a wrap for healthy alternatives to bread! 

Why does my chicken salad taste bland? 

Chicken salad can taste bland if there are not any seasoning or fun mix-ins. To keep chicken salad from tasting bland, season with salt and pepper, stir in fresh herbs, add in seedless grapes, green onion or red wine vinegar for different ways to spice up chicken salad! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A croissant sandwich filled with leafy greens, tomato slices, and a creamy turkey salad with chopped vegetables, served on a white plate.
    Easy Smoked Turkey Salad (leftover Thanksgiving recipe)
  • A roasted turkey on a tray, surrounded by lemon slices and fresh herbs like parsley and rosemary, garnished for presentation. The turkey is golden-brown and placed on a textured metal serving dish.
    Juicy Spatchcocked Smoked Turkey (Smoker Recipe)
  • Salmon fillets on baking sheet with asparagus and potatoes.
    Honey Butter Old Bay Salmon (Easy Sheet Pan Dinner)
  • Tray of air fryer chicken tenders with sauces.
    Naked Air Fryer Chicken Tenders (Tysons Chicken) 

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free):

  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Vegetable Bruschetta with cherry tomatoes, zucchini and yellow squash drizzled with a balsamic glaze
    Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash
  • Pineapple Baked Beans in a bowl with corn bread and pan of baked beans
    Pineapple Baked Beans (Using Black Beans)
  • Plate with ricotta toast and tomatoes on top.
    Cherry Tomato Ricotta Toast (Easy Appetizer Recipe)

Gluten Free Chicken Salad on Lettuce Wraps with Red Grapes
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free)

Easy and Classic Chicken Salad (Gluten Free) is the ultimate chicken salad recipe! Made with simple ingredients and pantry staples, this creamy chicken salad recipe is a perfect light dinner or weekday lunch! 
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Main Course, Salad
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 311kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Slow Cooker
  • Stand Mixer with Paddle Attachment
  • Large Mixing Bowl
  • Large Spoon or Spatula
  • Airtight Container for storing

Ingredients

  • 1.5 lbs Chicken Breast cooked and shredded
  • 2 Celery Stalks chopped
  • 1/4 cup Red Onion chopped
  • Salt and Pepper
  • 3/4 cup Mayonaisse
  • 1 tbsp Spicy Brown Mustard
  • 1 tbsp Lemon Juice
  • 1 tbsp Fresh Tarragon finely chopped
  • 1 tbsp Fresh Chives finely chopped
  • 1 tbsp Fresh Thyme finely chopped

Instructions

  • Add chicken, celery, red onion, mayonnaise, mustard, lemon juice, tarragon, chives and thyme to a large mixing bowl. Thoroughly mix together. Season with salt and pepper to taste. Refrigerate until ready to serve. Serve in lettuce cups, over salad or on bread.

Notes

For the moistest chicken breast, cook chicken in the crockpot. Season both sides of the chicken with salt and pepper. Add 1/4 cup chicken broth to the crock pot. Cook on low for 4 hours. Immediately shred chicken. 
The easiest way to shred chicken is in your stand mixer! Simply, transfer warm boneless chicken breasts directly into the bowl of your stand mixer. Using the paddle attachment, mix on low until chicken is shredded. Now, use your mixing bowl to mix up the chicken salad! 

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 311kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 13g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 70mg | Sodium: 1.376mg | Potassium: 477mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 163IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Spring Recipes, Summer Recipes

Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)

July 25, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Hand reaching to try a delicious and classic espresso martini made with rum

Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum) is a tasty spin on the classic espresso martini recipe! Made with only 3 ingredients, anyone can make this martini at home!

Espresso Martinis have become popular over the past few years especially during the holidays. For me, espresso martinis have become popular ever since becoming a mom (3 1/2 years ago).

This cocktail recipe was inspired by the famous Espresso Martini recipe at Starboard Raw in Dewey Beach, Delaware. This is not the exact recipe (their recipe is top secret), I do think that this Espresso Martini using Rum comes close to cracking their secret!

Who doesn’t like making martinis at home? Try these Party Cosmopolitans. This is a large batch recipe for a classic Cosmopolitan. The perfect drink for holiday parties! Or, try these White Christmas Cosmos! For a lighter holiday martini, this recipe uses white cranberry juice and elderberry liqueur for a fun spin on a classic cocktail!

Jump to:
  • Classic Espresso Martini (using Rum) Details
  • Ingredients
  • How to Make an Espresso Martini (using Rum)
  • Can I make this drink into a mocktail?
  • Drink Tips!
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)

Classic Espresso Martini (using Rum) Details

Flavor: Sweet! Using dark rum in this martini gives the drink a slightly sweet taste.

Time: Less than 5 minutes! Be sure to prepare your espresso ahead of time to allow for it to cool down.

Level of difficulty: Simple! Just measure, pour and shake it up for an easy espresso martini at home!

Ingredients

With only 3 ingredients, this Espresso Martini is simple to make.

  • Espresso: If you don’t have espresso, substitute very strong coffee or cold brew coffee. Don’t be intimidated to brew espresso at home. Try using this Stovetop Espresso Maker to make espresso in minutes!
  • Dark Rum: I like to use a dark spiced rum because it has hints of vanilla and warm spices which boosts the flavor in this martini. Try Captain Morgan, Bacardi or Sailor Jerry’s in this recipe.
  • Coffee Liqueur: The most well known coffee liqueur is Kahlua. Don’t be scared to try a different coffee liqueur!

How to Make an Espresso Martini (using Rum)

Make this classic martini in just 3 simple steps!

  1. Add espresso, rum and coffee liqueur to a cocktail shaker with ice.
  2. Shake vigorously for 1 minute until outside of shaker becomes cold and icy.
  3. Pour directly into a chilled martini glass and enjoy!

Can I make this drink into a mocktail?

The dark rum is what really makes this Espresso Martini (using Rum). Substitute a non-alcoholic rum such as Ritual’s Zero Proof Rum and use Lyre’s Coffee Originale Non-Alcoholic Spirit to create an Espresso Martini Mocktail with a rum flavor!

Drink Tips!

  • Espresso is different from strongly brewed coffee and cold brew! To get a classic espresso martini flavor, use espresso.
  • This martini is best served immediately. If you want to make this ahead of time, add all ingredients to a cocktail shaker without the ice. Refrigerate until ready to serve. Add the ice before shaking and serving.
  • To get a frothy martini, shake the cocktail vigorously! Immediately pour into a chilled espresso martini glass for a beautiful and frothy martini!
Two espresso martinis topped with froth and espresso beans

Equipment

Only basic equipment is needed to make this Espresso Martini using Rum!

  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Shot Glass or Jigger
  • Martini Glass

Storage

Store any leftover espresso martini in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If preparing this cocktail ahead of time, add all ingredients to a cocktail shaker. Do not add ice. Refrigerate until ready to serve. Add ice and shake cocktail vigorously before serving.

Top tip

For the frothiest espresso martini, shake the cocktail shaker up and down and back and forth. Set a timer to be sure to shake for at least one minute. The outside of the cocktail shaker should be cold and icy. If your hands are too cold, cover the cocktail shaker with a towel while you shake. Immediately pour the espresso martini into a martini glass.

FAQ

What is an espresso martini made of?

Traditional espresso martinis are made of vodka, espresso, coffee liqueur such as Kahlua and, often, a simple syrup. This recipe replaces the vodka with a spiced rum for a sweet and smooth taste!

Can you use rum in an espresso martini instead of vodka?

Yes, you can use rum in an espresso martini instead of vodka, just try this recipe! Rum gives an espresso martini a vanilla flavor with subtle spices such as cinnamon, cardamon and anise.

Help! My espresso martini isn’t frothy!

If your espresso martini is not frothy, it may be because you have not shaken the cocktail shaker hard enough or long enough. I recommend shaking for at least 1 minute to activate the oils in the coffee beans to begin to froth. Shake up and down and back and forth. The cocktail shaker should be visibly icy.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Two martinis on tray with raspberries and blackberries on the side.
    Blackberry Martini Recipe (Outback Copycat Recipe)
  • An Almond Joy Martini with a cocktail shaker and Almond Joy candy bars on a wooden tray.
    Almond Joy Martini Recipe (Vodka Cocktail with Chocolate)

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with martinis!

  • Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
    How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board
  • Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam
    Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam
  • Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Proscuitto
    Easy Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Prosciutto
  • Greek Vegetable Flatbread cut into triangular slices with peppers, onions, feta and fresh herbs
    Vegetable Greek Flatbread

Print Recipe

Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum)

Classic Espresso Martini Recipe (using Rum) is a tasty spin on an espresso martini! Made with only 3 ingredients, everyone can make this martini at home!
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 233kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Shot Glass or Jigger
  • Espresso Maker if making own espresso
  • Martini Glass

Ingredients

  • 2 oz Espresso Room Temperature or Chilled
  • 2 oz Dark Rum
  • 1 oz Coffee Liqueur

Instructions

  • Add espresso, rum and coffee liqueur to a cocktail shaker filled with ice. Shake vigorously for a minute until outside of cocktail shaker is cold. Pour into a chilled martini glass. Garnish with coffee beans.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 233kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 66mg | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 1mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Coffee, Recipes

Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad

July 19, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

A delicious bowl of Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad

Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad is an herby pasta dish made with the best summer produce. Tomatoes are roasted in garlic and combined with a light dressing to make a delicious pasta!

I have been making pasta salad creations for as long as I remember. Most of those involved blocks of cheese and store bought salad dressing. I have switched things up with this Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad. A light homemade dressing is made with fresh herbs, tomatoes are roasted in garlic and summer corn is steamed. Combined with penne pasta, this dish tastes like summer!

If you are looking for another light pasta recipe that feeds a crowd, try this Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables. Every time I make this, I get asked for the recipe and have no leftovers!

Jump to:
  • Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Details
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Roasted Tomato and Corn Summer Pasta Salad

Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Details

Flavor: This pasta tastes like summer! The pasta is sweet from the corn and roasted tomatoes and earthy from the herbs.

Time: 30 minutes. There are a few extra steps to make this pasta salad (roasting the tomatoes, steaming the corn and making the dressing). Trust me, all of these steps lead to a delicious dish!

Level of Difficulty: Medium! While all of the tasks in this recipe are simple, there are a few. If you plan ahead, you can make the dressing while the corn is steaming and make the tomatoes while the pasta is boiling.

Ingredients

Stop by your favorite farm stand for the freshest corn, tomatoes and herbs!

  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Cherry Tomatoes
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Fresh Thyme Sprigs
  • Salt and Pepper
  • Penne Pasta- substitute another medium to short pasta such as Rotini, Campanelle or Farfelle would work in this recipe.
  • Parmesan Cheese- use fresh grated if possible.
  • Lemon Juice
  • Crushed Red Pepper Flakes
  • Steamed Corn- substitute canned or frozen corn.
  • Fresh Rosemary Sprigs
  • Fresh Oregano
  • Fresh Basil

Instructions

  1. Steam Corn. Remove corn husk and clean corn cobs. Bring water to a boil. Add corn and boil for 7 minutes. Remove from water and let cool. Once cool, use a sharp knife to remove corn kernels from cob.
  2. Make Pasta Dressing. While corn is steaming, combine the pasta dressing in a large mixing bowl. Add EVOO, lemon juice, basil, rosemary, oregano, crushed red pepper and parmesan. Whisk to combine.
  3. Roast Tomatoes. Add 1 TBSP of EVOO to a sauté pan and turn heat to medium. Once EVOO is hot, add tomatoes, garlic and thyme. Season with salt and pepper. Cook, stirring occasionally, for about 10 minutes until tomatoes have burst.
  4. Boil Pasta. While the tomatoes are roasting, cook the pasta according to box directions to make al dente pasta. Drain pasta.
  5. Combine pasta with dressing. While pasta is still hot, pour into dressing. Stir quickly to mix the dressing with the pasta.
  6. Combine pasta with tomatoes and corn. Add tomatoes with the garlic and juices. Add the corn and stir.
  7. Season with salt and pepper. Serve pasta hot or cold. If serving a few days after being made, you may have to add extra lemon juice or EVOO.

Variations

Here a few different ideas to change this recipe for different taste buds!

  • Simpler – use canned or frozen corn and a store-bought salad dressing. I have been using this House Vinaigrette from Aldi. It is the perfect, light dressing and pairs well with the corn and tomatoes.
  • Deluxe – add feta cheese! I like to add feta when the pasta is still hot so that it melts into the noodles.
  • Kid friendly – If you are trying to incorporate more vegetables in your kiddo’s diets, add some spinach to the tomatoes. Cook the spinach until it is wilted. Combine with the pasta and you will have a sneaky vegetable in the pasta salad!

Equipment

  • 2 Large Pots (one for steaming corn, the other for boiling the pasta)
  • Sauté Pan
  • Large Mixing Bowl
  • Large Rimmed Baking Sheet

Storage

Store pasta refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 5 days. The pasta may absorb the dressing while refrigerated. If pasta seems dry, add EVOO and/or lemon juice and stir.

Top tip

Always use the bigger bowl! This pasta salad serves a crowd. Use a large bowl to mix the pasta with the dressing, corn and tomatoes.

Use high quality pasta. More expensive pasta is fresher. You can taste the difference in the texture and thickness of the pasta. I believe that more expensive pasta is more filling.

Have ingredients prepped and ready. Make sure that the dressing and tomatoes are ready to go when the pasta is done cooking. You want to combine all the ingredients when they are hot so that they easily mix together.

FAQ

How do you make pasta salad not soggy?

Make pasta salad not soggy by not overdressing the pasta salad. In this Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad recipe, the dressing recipe is light and is simply made. Use the recipe card ingredient amounts. This will make a light dressing. If more dressing is needed at the time of serving, add EVOO and lemon juice until you reach the desired flavor.

Why does pasta salad taste better the next day?

Pasta salad tastes better the next day because the flavors have time to bind together. Be sure to stir and taste the pasta before serving to make sure that no dressing has settled in the bottom of the bowl. Season with salt and pepper and more dressing if necessary.

What if I don’t have fresh herbs to use in the pasta salad?

If you do not have fresh herbs, use dried herbs. Use a 3 to 1 ratio for fresh to dried herbs. So, if a recipe calls for 1 cup fresh herbs substitute the fresh herbs with 1/3 cup dried herbs.

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Two pulled chicken sandwiches stacked on top of each other with Jack Daniels BBQ Sauce and a beer.
    Jack Daniel’s Pulled BBQ Chicken (Crockpot Recipe)
  • A delicious bowl of White Chicken Chili served with shredded cheddar cheese, sliced jalapenos, green onions and cornbread.
    Smoky White Chicken Chili with Bacon and Beans
  • Slice of creamy Venison Lasagna with a whole pan of lasagna in the background.
    The BEST Venison Lasagna Recipe (using Cottage Cheese)
  • Bowl of Onion Soup Beef Stew with green beans, carrots and potatoes
    Slow Cooker Classic Beef Stew (using Onion Soup Mix)

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with this recipe:

  • A glass bowl of creamy Cottage Cheese Taco Dip garnished with cilantro, surrounded by fresh vegetable sticks and a yellow patterned napkin.
    Easy 3-Ingredient Cottage Cheese Taco Dip Recipe
  • A plate of crispy smashed potatoes topped with crumbled cheese and chopped herbs, served on a buffalo sauce. There's a gold fork on the side. A small dish with more cheese crumbles is partially visible in the background.
    Crispy Blue Cheese Buffalo Smashed Potatoes
  • A rectangular tart with golden brown pastry, topped with sliced sweet potatoes and mushrooms. Garnished with herbs. Surrounding the tart are sprigs of greenery and an orange vegetable slice on a light wooden surface.
    Savory Roasted Sweet Potato and Mushroom Tart 
  • A glass bowl filled with a savory Old Bay Chex Mix, featuring square cereal pieces and pretzels, seasoned to perfection. The mix is placed on a wooden surface, with additional snack pieces and a can of Old Bay seasoning visible in the background.
    Sweet and Salty Old Bay Chex Mix
A delicious bowl of Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad
Print Recipe

Roasted Tomato and Corn Summer Pasta Salad

Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad is an herby pasta dish made with the best summer produce. Tomatoes are roasted in garlic and combined with a light dressing to make a delicious pasta!
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time30 minutes mins
Course: Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 332kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Saute Pan
  • 2 Large Pots
  • 1 Large Mixing Bowl
  • 1 Microwavable Measuring Cup
  • 1 Large Rimmed Baking Sheet

Ingredients

  • 1/3 cup Extra Virgin Olive Oil plus 1 TBSP
  • 10 oz Cherry Tomatoes
  • 4 Garlic Cloves Chopped
  • 2 Thyme Sprigs
  • Salt and Pepper
  • 1 lb Penne Pasta
  • 1/2 cup Grated Parmesan Cheese
  • 1 Juice of a Lemon
  • Crushed Red Pepper Flakes
  • 6 Ears Steamed Corn Kernels removed
  • 2 Rosemary Sprigs Chopped
  • 1 tbsp Oregano Chopped
  • 1/2 cup Basil Chopped

Instructions

  • Add 1 TBSP EVOO to a large sauté pan over medium heat. Add cherry tomatoes, garlic cloves and thyme. Season with salt and pepper. Cook, stirring often, until tomatoes have burst. Remove from heat.
  • Cook pasta al dente. Drain pasta.
  • Add EVOO, parmesan cheese, basil, rosemary, oregano, crushed red pepper and lemon juice to a large bowl. Stir to combine. Add hot pasta and stir to coat pasta with dressing.
  • Stir in corn and tomatoes with juice.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 332kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 118mg | Potassium: 255mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 334IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Side Dishes, Summer Recipes

Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)

July 19, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts

Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)  is a simple sweet snack recipe! All of the delicious components of a Payday Candy Bar are used in a tasty Chex mix recipe! 

Homemade Chex Mix is my weakness and a family favorite recipe. It is a dessert that I make at the holidays because everyone loves a handheld snack and this recipe makes a ton. I hope that this Chex Mix recipe will soon become one of your favorite treats! 

Want to another cereal treat? Try these Browned Butter S’mores Treats! Made with Golden Graham cereal, marshmallows and chocolate, these are a simple no bake recipe! 

Jump to:
  • What is a Payday Bar?
  • Payday Bar Chex Mix Details 
  • Ingredients
  • Let’s Get Cookin’!
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Expert Tips
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • Homemade Payday Bar Candy Chex Mix

What is a Payday Bar?

A Payday Bar is a candy bar originally made by Frank Martoccio. Today, Hershey’s produces Payday Bars. The bar has a creamy caramel center coated with salty peanuts. Check out all of the Payday bar variations here.

Payday Bar Chex Mix Details 

Flavor: Sweet and slightly salty- a delicious combination! The homemade caramel sauce gives this Chex Mix a sweet flavor and the peanuts add the perfect amount of saltiness. 

Time: This Chex Mix takes about an hour and 15 minutes to make. 15 minutes to make the caramel sauce and combine it with the cereal and an hour of bake time. 

Level of Difficulty: Simple but don’t go too far from the kitchen! There is no prep time! The caramel sauce is made in the microwave. The Chex mix is baked in the oven for an hour and does require stirring the mix every 15 minutes.

Ingredients

These ingredients are all pantry staples, so head to your local grocery store! 

  • Corn Chex Mix: Could also use Rice Chex Mix.
  • Honey Nut Chex Mix
  • Chocolate Chex Mix
  • Salted Peanuts: Could use cocktail peanuts or unsalted peanuts. If using unsalted peanuts, add 1 tsp salt to the caramel sauce to taste. 
  • White Sugar
  • Brown Sugar
  • Butter 
  • Water
  • Baking Soda 

Let’s Get Cookin’!

  1. Preheat oven. Heat oven to 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a rimmed baking pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil. 
  2. Combine cereal. In a large bowl, combine the Rice Chex, Chocolate Chex and Honey Nut Chex. 
  3. Make Caramel Sauce. This may sound intimidating but it can all be done in the microwave! Simply, add the white sugar, brown sugar, butter and water to a large microwave-safe bowl or  measuring cup. Microwave for 1 minute to melt butter. Remove from microwave and stir. If butter is not completely melted, continue to microwave for 30 second intervals stirring in between. Once butter is melted and the sugar is dissolved, stir in baking soda. *This caramel recipe was taken from this Caramel Peanut’n’Popcorn Recipe. 
  4. Add caramel to cereal. Pour caramel sauce over top of Chex cereal. Stir thoroughly to coat all cereal with sauce. 
  5. Pour on baking sheet. Pour mixture into one even layer on a large baking sheet.
  6. Bake. Bake for one hour stirring cereal every 15 minutes. 
  7. Add peanuts. Add peanuts to cereal and stir to combine. 
  8. Let cool. Allow Chex mix to come to room temperature. Store in an airtight container. 

Equipment

This recipe requires very simple equipment:

  • Large Rimmed Baking Sheet
  • Parchment Paper
  • Small Microwavable Mixing Bowl or a Glass Measuring Cup
  • Large Mixing Bowl
  • Airtight Container (for Storage)

Storage

Store Payday Bar Chex Mix in an airtight container. The cereal will stay fresh for up to 2 weeks in an airtight container.

Payday Bar Chex Mix on Baking Tray

Expert Tips

Expert Tips

Make it more chocolatey! The original Payday Bars do not have chocolate (I added the chocolate Chex because they are my favorite). However, Hershey’s has made a few variations to their candy bars. Some of these variations include chocolate. To make your Payday Bar Chex Mix more chocolatey, simply melt chocolate chips with the caramel sauce and stir in with the dry ingredients. You could also try this with white chocolate chips! 

Make this Chex Mix Halloween themed! Make candy corn party mix by adding candy corn and candy eyes! 

Here are some other fun mix ins! For a salty snack mix, add in more peanuts or pretzels! To make this Chex mix similar to trail mix, add in extra nuts, raisins and/or chocolate candies! To make this recipe like a traditional puppy chow recipe, coat the cereal with powdered sugar. Adding popcorn is always fun! For an extra hit of caramel, add caramel corn! 

FAQ

Can you use generic Chex Mix cereal for this recipe?

Yes, you can use generic brand chex cereal for this recipe! I have used generic corn and rice chex in my chex mix recipes for years and the recipes have turned out great. I have not been able to find store brand Honey Nut Chex or Chocolate Chex. If you find it, tell me where to buy! 

Can you make Payday Bar Chex Mix in the microwave?

Yes, you can make Payday Bar Chex Mix in the microwave. However, baking the cereal provided a much crunchier result. The microwave version was softer and quickly tasted stale. I do not recommend making this recipe in the microwave. 

Can this recipe be made in the slow cooker?

This recipe has not been tested in the slow cooker. If you try this recipe in the slow cooker, please let me know how you do it! 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • A platter of parmesan bread bites with pizza sauce.
    Air Fryer Parmesan Bread Bites (Copycat Domino’s)
  • Air Fryer Potato Wedges (Buffalo Wild Wings Copycat)
  • Roasted Indian Cauliflower (Easy Air Fryer Recipe)
  • Biscoff Cookie Butter Chex Mix placed in a large mixing bowl with extra cookies and cookie butter.
    Biscoff Cookie Butter Chex Mix (Muddy Buddy Snack)

Pairing

These are my favorite dishes to serve with [this recipe]:

  • A delicious bowl of Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad
    Roasted Tomato and Corn Pasta Salad
  • Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with rice, mushrooms, carrots, apples and cranberry sauce on a serving platter
    Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with Rice and Vegetables
  • Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with pesto, tomatoes, zucchini and corn
    Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto
  • Tray of Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas topped with avocados and cilantro
    Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas
A bowl of Payday Bar Chex Mix with spilled cereal and salty peanuts
Print Recipe

Homemade Payday Bar Candy Chex Mix

Homemade Payday Bar Chex Mix (with Peanuts)  is a simple sweet snack recipe! All of the delicious components of a Payday Candy Bar are used in a tasty Chex mix recipe! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 12
Calories: 231kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large Rimmed Baking Sheet
  • Parchment Paper
  • Microwavable Measuring Cup
  • Large Mixing Bowl
  • Airtight Container for Storage

Ingredients

  • 4 cups Corn Chex Mix
  • 2 cup Honey Nut Chex Mix
  • 2 cups Chocolate Chex Mix
  • 1 cup Salted Peanuts
  • 1/4 cup White Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Brown Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Butter
  • 1 tbsp Water
  • 1/8 tsp Baking Soda

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 250 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Add Corn Chex, Honey Nut Chex and Chocolate Chex to a large microwave safe bowl.
  • Microwave White Sugar, Brown Sugar, Butter and Water for 1 minute. Remove from microwave and stir. Continue to microwave for 30 second increments until sugar is dissolved and smooth. Stir in Baking Soda.
  • Pour caramel sauce over top of cereal and and stir to coat.
  • Add peanuts to cereal and stir to combine.
  • Bake for 1 hour stirring every 15 minutes.
  • Let cool on baking sheet. Store in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 12g | Calories: 231kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 266mg | Potassium: 170mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 8mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Dessert, Recipes

Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)

June 30, 2023 by Lynne Kenton 1 Comment

Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice

Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo is a simple and delicious one pot meal! This Cuban inspired dish is full of vegetables, healthy garbanzo beans and spicy chorizo to make a tasty side dish or main course! 

Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice

Dinners that come together quickly and are cooked in one pot are the kind of dinners I am looking for. It is even better if the meal tastes better the following day! If you are looking for a simple, crowd please dinner this Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo is your meal.

Looking for another one pan meal? Try this One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes. This is an elegant yet simple dinner that will teach even the most basic cook how to make delicious fish! Or, try these Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas. These enchiladas could not be easier to make! I like to make a double batch to share a tray! 

Jump to:
  • Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Details
  • Ingredients
  • Let’s Get Cookin’!
  • Expert Tips
  • What to Serve Frito Chickpeas with
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Easy Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)

Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Details

Flavor: The chorizo provides a slightly spicy flavor that perfectly pairs with the mild garbanzo beans. The tomato base rounds out the spice with a slightly sweet taste. 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! This dinner could not be any easier to make. All that it takes is one large skillet and some time chopping vegetables. 

Time: This complete meal comes together in 30 minutes. This includes prep time. 

Ingredients

  • Bell Pepper: You can use any color that you like. I prefer the taste of red peppers but a yellow, orange or green pepper can be used. 
  • Red Onion: Substitute a white onion if you don’t have red. 
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Garlic Cloves 
  • Ground Chorizo Sausage: Use Spanish Chorizo if possible for more flavor.
  • Fire Roasted Diced Tomatoes: Substitute fresh tomatoes if you have them. 
  • Garbanzo Beans: Also called chickpeas. 
  • Tomato Sauce 
  • Salt
  • Pepper
  • Paprika
  • Oregano: Use freshly chopped oregano if available. 
  • Cumin
  • White Rice: Could use brown rice, quinoa or French bread. 
  • Fresh Parsley: For serving. Substitute cilantro. 
Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo ingredients: cumin, oregano, paprika, salt, pepper, garlic, garbanzo beans, bell pepper, red onion, tomato sauce, diced tomatoes and chorizo

Let’s Get Cookin’!

  1.  Start by chopping your bell pepper and onion. The vegetables should be diced into small pieces. Mince garlic cloves. 
  2.  Add EVOO to a large bottomed skillet. Heat EVOO at medium-high heat. 
  3. Once EVOO is hot, add bell pepper and onion. Sauté vegetables for 5-6 minutes stirring occasionally until vegetables are soft. 
  4. Add minced garlic cloves and stir for 45 seconds until fragrant. 
  5. Add chorizo sausage. Break chorizo apart as you brown the meat. 
  6. Once cooked, turn stove down to medium heat. Add garbanzo beans, diced tomatoes, tomato sauce, salt, pepper, oregano, paprika and cumin. Stir to combine. 
  7. Once combined, turn heat down to medium low heat. Cook uncovered for 20 minutes until there is a thick sauce.  
  8. Top with fresh parsley or cilantro. Serve with white rice or crusty bread. 
All ingredients for Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo simmering together

Expert Tips

  • To make this dish vegetarian, omit the chorizo and use more garbanzo beans and vegetables. 
  • Avoid soggy chickpeas by cooking this dish uncovered. 
  • Prepare all ingredients ahead of time! This dish comes together very quickly. Prep the vegetables and drain and rinse the garbanzo beans ahead of cooking. 
  • To add more spice to this dish, add some red pepper flakes or cayenne pepper.

What to Serve Frito Chickpeas with

This dish is often served as a side dish. In the case of a side dish, I would serve the Fritos Chickpeas with Chorizo as prepared above without the rice. To make this dish into a meal, serve it over: 

  • White Rice
  • Quinoa
  • With crispy bread 
  • With Pita bread
  • As a taco with cheese (not traditional but delicious and toddler approved!)
Overhead shot of Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo showing the delicious textures of the chickpeas, chorizo and cilantro

Equipment

  • Cutting Board
  • Sharp Knife
  • Garlic Mincer (optional)
  • Large Skillet 

Storage

Store leftovers refrigerated in an airtight container. Oftentimes, this main dish is more flavorful the next day after the flavors meld together. 

FAQ

Are chickpeas and garbanzo beans the same thing?

Yes, chickpeas and garbanzo beans are the same thing. 

How do you cook chickpeas?

You can cook chickpeas by simmering them on the stove until soft. However, this recipe uses canned chickpeas which are precooked. You can essentially eat the chickpeas out of the can. Just be sure to rinse them off first to remove excess sodium used to preserve them. 

Can you freeze canned chickpeas?

Yes, you can freeze canned chickpeas. For this recipe, make sure that the dish is completely cool and at room temperature. Seal the Fritos Chickpeas in an airtight bag or container making sure to remove all air. Freeze for up to 3 months. 

Related

Looking for other recipes like this? Try these:

  • Curry Shrimp Quinoa Bowls with Zesty Peanut Sauce on the side
    Curry Shrimp Quinoa Bowl with Zesty Peanut Sauce
  • Red Wine Beef Stew
    Red Wine Beef Stew
  • A white bowl brimming with a delectable Buddha Bowl assortment featuring cooked salmon, chickpeas, quinoa, roasted Brussels sprouts, and squash. Wooden chopsticks rest gracefully on the bowl. Nearby, a small dish with diced mango and a jar sit atop a white surface adorned with a patterned cloth.
    Healthy Salmon Buddha Bowl with Roasted Vegetables
Close up shot of chickpeas, diced tomatoes and chorizo in a bowl over rice
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Easy Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo Recipe (One Pot Meal)

Frito Chickpeas with Chorizo is a simple and delicious one pot meal! This Cuban inspired dish is full of vegetables, healthy garbanzo beans and spicy chorizo to make a tasty side dish or main course! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Main Course, Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4
Calories: 434kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Large Heavy Bottom Skillet
  • 1 Sharp Knife
  • 1 Cutting Board

Ingredients

  • 1 tbsp EVOO
  • 1 Bell Pepper Chopped
  • 3 Garlic Cloves Chopped
  • 1 Red Onion Chopped
  • 8 oz Ground Chorizo
  • 14.5 oz Fire Roasted Diced Tomatoes
  • 8 oz Tomato Sauce
  • 14.5 oz Garbanzo Beans Drained and Rinsed
  • 1 tsp Salt
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper
  • 1/2 tsp Paprika
  • 1 tsp Oregano
  • 1/2 tsp Cumin
  • White Rice for serving

Instructions

  • Heat EVOO over medium high heat.
  • Once EVOO is hot, sauté bell pepper and onion for 5-6 minutes until soft.
  • Add in garlic and stir for 30 seconds to 1 minute until fragrant.
  • Add chorizo. Break up chorizo while browning.
  • Once chorizo is brown, add garbanzo beans, diced tomatoes, tomato sauce, salt, pepper, oregano, paprika and cumin. Stir to combine.
  • Turn heat down to medium low. Cook uncovered for 20 minutes.
  • Serve hot with rice or crispy bread.

Nutrition

Serving: 4g | Calories: 434kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 1.715mg | Potassium: 596mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 2.055IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 113mg | Iron: 5mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Winter Recipes

One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes

May 23, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Plate of roasted fish with garlic cherry tomatoes served over pasta with basil garnish

One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes is an elegant yet simple recipe. Serve this white fish dish over pasta or with a side of crusty bread for dinner on busy weeknights !

With summer beginning, I am all about using fresh produce to make quick, light dinners. This fish recipe will soon become your favorite entertaining meal and what’s for dinner tonight! 

Looking for another Cherry Tomato recipe? Try this Cherry Tomato Toast with Honey Whipped Ricotta. This easy appetizer makes the best use of fresh summer tomatoes!

 

Jump to:
  • One Pan Roasted Fish Details
  • Ingredients
  • Let’s Get Cookin’!
  • Expert Tips
  • What to Serve with Roasted Fish
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • FAQ
  • Related
  • Pairing
  • One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes

One Pan Roasted Fish Details

Flavor: Fresh, sweet with a little lemon tang! This roasted fish dish has a slight lemony taste in the sauce. The sweet cherry roasted tomatoes burst when cooking to add a sweetness to the sauce. The fish is cooked in olive oil and sprinkled with fresh basil. All in all, this dish tastes like summer!

Level of Difficulty: Medium. This dish is not difficult to make, however, seafood recipes are not dishes that most people make everyday. Not to worry, I will walk you through how to make it! 

Time: 15 minutes! This entire dish comes together very quickly. It is best to have all of your ingredients prepped and ready to go. 

Ingredients

With just a few simple ingredients, most being pantry staples, you can make this delicious roasted fish recipe in under 20 minutes!

One Pot Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes Ingredients: Mahi Mahi, Angel Hair Pasta, Pepper, Salt, Crushed Red Pepper, Parmesan Cheese, Cherry Tomatoes, Lemon, Olive Oil, White Wine, Basil and Garlic

  • Fish: I recommend using mild white fish fillets such as halibut, sea bass, rockfish, mahi or cod fillets. 
  • Parmesan Cheese: Fresh grated is best! 
  • Basil: Use fresh basil chopped into ribbons. If you cannot use fresh basil, fresh thyme or oregano would pair nicely with this main dish. 
  • Lemon: You will need the lemon zest and lemon juice. 
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Cherry Tomatoes 
  • Red Pepper Flakes 
  • Garlic Cloves
  • White Wine: I recommend using a Pinot Grigio or a Sauvignon Blanc. 
  • Angel Hair Pasta: If you don’t have Angel Hair Pasta, use a spaghetti or linguine. 
  • Black Pepper
  • Kosher Salt 

See recipe card for quantities.

Let’s Get Cookin’!

1. Start by drying the fish with paper towels and seasoning with salt and pepper on both sides.

2. Add water and salt to a large pot. Cook pasta for 1 minute less than the box directions. Reserve 1 cup of pasta cooking water before draining. 

3. Heat a large cast iron pan over medium-high heat. Once pan is hot, add Extra Virgin Olive Oil, Garlic and Red Chili Flakes. Stir for 30 seconds. 

4. Add fish skin side down and the cherry tomatoes. Let fish and tomatoes cook for 2 minutes untouched. 

5. Add wine to deglaze the pan scraping the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon.

6. Flip fish over and cook for 90 more seconds while the tomatoes roast. Use the remaining juices to baste the fish. Check that the fish have reached an internal temperature of 130 degrees Fahrenheit. Turn down to medium heat.

7. Lift fish and tomatoes to place pasta underneath in the pan. Place fish and tomatoes in a single layer over top of pasta.  Add lemon juice, lemon zest, fresh basil and parmesan cheese to the fish. Stir to combine. 

8. If more sauce is needed, add pasta cooking water in 1/4 cup increments to the pan. Stir to combine. 

9. Serve topped with fresh basil. 

Expert Tips

  • Prepare all of your ingredients ahead of time. Slice the basil leaves, zest the lemon and chop the garlic. This dish comes together very quickly! 
  • For the wine, use whatever white wine you have on hand. I have tested this recipe with a sweeter Riesling and it was delicious! 
  • Use fresh ingredients, they are the best part of this dish! 
  • Store leftovers in an airtight container and eat the very next day for the best leftovers. 
  • Use a mixture of tomatoes for a colorful dish! 

What to Serve with Roasted Fish

  • Serve over pasta (as instructed) 
  • Serve with a green salad 
  • Serve with your favorite grains such as quinoa or lentils 
  • Serve with vegetables such as green beans and potatoes 
A delicious plate of roasted fish over pasta with garlic cherry tomatoes and basil

Equipment

Not a lot of equipment is required to make this fish dish! You will need:

  • Large pot to make the pasta
  • Pasta strainer
  • Measuring cup to reserve pasta water
  • Large Cast Iron Pan- here is the Lodge Pan that I love!

Storage

Fish is best served immediately. Refrigerate leftovers and enjoy the next day. I do not recommend reheating the fish. This fish pasta is great enjoyed cold!

FAQ

What fish is best in pasta?

I like to use a white fish in pasta or salmon. Mahi Mahi and Sea Bass are delicious options that have a buttery flavor. Salmon is simple to cook and is a general crowd pleaser.

What temperature should you cook fish to?

The FDA recommends cooking fish to a 145 degrees Fahrenheit. The temperature of the fish should be taken from its thickest point.

Do you cover fish when cooking?

In this recipe, you do not cover the fish while cooking.

Related

Looking for other seafood recipes like this? Try one of these!

  • Cheese and deli meat option added to seafood platter for a complete Seafood Charcuterie Board
    The Ultimate Seafood Charcuterie Board

Pairing

Here are some fun dishes to serve with the roasted fish or any main course this summer:

  • A sweet potato and halloumi salad elegantly sits in a bowl, featuring leafy greens, roasted sweet potatoes, chickpeas, and pomegranate seeds. Chunks of halloumi cheese are topped with a drizzle of dressing. A wooden table and fresh sweet potatoes complete the backdrop.
    Roasted Sweet Potato and Grilled Halloumi Salad
  • A close-up of a white bowl filled with quinoa salad, featuring chunks of beetroot, arugula leaves, and green herbs. The dish appears colorful and fresh, highlighting a healthy and vibrant mix of ingredients.
    Roasted Beet Quinoa Salad with Maple Dijon Dressing
  • A serving bowl full of pasta mixed with kale and tomatoes. Parmesan and fresh herbs surround the bowl.
    Easy Sun-Dried Tomato and Kale Pasta Salad
A delicious plate of roasted fish over pasta with garlic cherry tomatoes and basil
Print Recipe

One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes

One Pan Roasted Fish with Garlic Cherry Tomatoes is an elegant yet simple recipe. Serve this white fish dish over pasta or with a side of crusty bread for dinner on busy weeknights !
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Servings: 2
Calories: 345kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large Pot
  • Strainer
  • Measuring Cup
  • Cast Iron Pan

Ingredients

  • 2 6 oz White Fish Filets
  • 1/4 cup Parmesan Cheese Grated
  • 1/4 cup Basil Sliced
  • Lemon Juice and Zest
  • 10 oz Cherry Tomatoes
  • Red Pepper Flakes Pinch
  • 4 Garlic Cloves Minced
  • 1/2 cup White Wine
  • 4 oz Angel Hair Uncooked
  • Kosher Salt and Black Pepper

Instructions

  • Dry the fish with paper towels and season both sides with salt and pepper.
  • Add water and salt to a large pot. Cook pasta for 1 minute less than the box directions. Reserve 1 cup of pasta cooking water before draining. 
  • Heat a large cast iron pan over medium-high heat. Once pan is hot, add Extra Virgin Olive Oil, Garlic and Red Chili Flakes. Stir for 30 seconds. 
  • Add fish skin side down and the cherry tomatoes. Let fish and tomatoes cook for 2 minutes untouched. 
  • Add wine to deglaze the pan scraping the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon.
  • Flip fish over and cook for 90 more seconds while the tomatoes roast. Use the remaining juices to baste the fish. Check that the fish have reached an internal temperature of 130 degrees Fahrenheit. Turn down to medium heat.
  • Lift fish and tomatoes to place pasta underneath in the pan. Place fish and tomatoes in a single layer over top of pasta.  Add lemon juice, lemon zest, fresh basil and parmesan cheese to the fish. Stir to combine. 
  • If more sauce is needed, add pasta cooking water in 1/4 cup increments to the pan. Stir to combine. 
  • Serve topped with fresh basil. 

Nutrition

Calories: 345kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 224mg | Potassium: 527mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 950IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 197mg | Iron: 2mg
 
 

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes, Seafood, Summer Recipes

How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board

May 18, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips

How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board gives you tips and tricks to build the most epic veggie charcuterie board that meat eaters, vegetarians and vegans will love!

Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips

The best thing about making a veggie charcuterie board is that there is no wrong way to make it. This colorful grazing board will appeal to everyone at your next party. 

If you are looking for other vegetarian appetizers, try this Smokey Mexican Bean Dip. This dip is so flavorful, no one will miss the meat! Or, try this Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto. Use vegan cheeses to make it perfect for all diets. 

Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board Details 

Difficulty: Easy! The hardest part is chopping all of your veggies and getting all of them to fit on a serving board!

Time: 20 minutes or less! Making this veggie board is simple. Prepare your vegetables by chopping them, blanching them (optional) and then arrange on a board with all the fixings! 

Flavor: If healthy had a taste, this vegetable charcuterie board would be it! The flavor will reflect the vegetables and dips used on the board. 

Ingredients


Start your board with your favorite fresh, raw vegetables. I like to choose vegetables that have a variety of vibrant colors. Here are a few of my favorite options: 

  • Cherry Tomatoes
  • Bell Peppers
  • Cucumber Slices
  • Carrot Sticks 
  • Celery Sticks 
  • Sugar Snap Peas 
  • Radishes 

Now, add your sauces. Some dipping sauces can be very bland in color. Try to add some colorful dips! Homemade dips are fun to include on the board but if you are looking for simple, no one will mind a store-bought items. 

  • Hummus
  • Guacamole
  • Ranch Dip
  • Tzatziki Sauce 
  • Salsa

Finally, add some garnishments to the board. The garnishes add color and texture. 

  • Lettuce- you can lay the veggies on top of the lettuce.
  • Sliced lemons 
  • Fresh herbs

Substitutions

For this blog photos, I kept the ingredients simple and only used vegetables and dips. Here are some other fun foods to add to your charcuterie board! 

  • Soft Cheeses like Goat Cheese or Brie
  • Hard Cheese like Manchego (my favorite) or a Sharp Cheddar
  • Vegan Cheeses
  • Fresh Fruit- apple slices are go to but be sure to drizzle them with lemon juice to keep them from browning. Depending on the season, I will also add strawberries, blood oranges or fresh cherries.
  • Traditional meats such as prosciutto and salami. I prefer to buy these freshly sliced from your local grocery store butcher. 
  • Fresh bread slices, pita chips or crackers. I like to have at least two grain options with one always being gluten free so that everyone can enjoy!
  • Dipping Sauces. I always include hummus for a vegan option. Other options are guacamole, ranch dressing, or even a simple olive oil dip. 
  • Seeds or nuts! Place these small items in little bowls or scatter them throughout the board. 
  • Red wine, white wine or a cocktail/mocktail of choice.
  • Garnishments make a beautiful board! I like to use fresh cut herbs from my garden to add color and texture to the board. You can also leave some of your vegetables uncut. For example, a small bunch of radishes with the greens or a purple cabbage leaves. 

Tools

Making this vegetarian board is simple. You only need a few tools: 

  • A sharp knife. I like to use this knife from Opinel. It is the only knife you will need in your kitchen. Get it here! 
  • A cutting board. You will want to work on a clean, flat surface. Bigger is better when it comes to a cutting board as you will be slicing and dicing lots of vegetables. The larger the cutting board, the more room you will have to work. 
  • A large board or serving platter. I like to use a round wooden board. Make sure that your serving platter is food safe if using wood. 
  • Small bowls for your dips. I like to use a variety of sizes to add contrast to the board. 
  • Small knifes and spoons for the dips. 

Let’s Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board

1. Start by cleaning your vegetables. I like to rinse all of my vegetables in a large strainer with warm water and lightly rub them. You do not need to use soap. Wash the vegetables before slicing. Once clean, dry them with a clean cloth or paper towel. 

2. Using a sharp knife, cut the raw vegetables. Slice the vegetables in an orientation that you will eat them. For the peppers and celery, slice into strips. Cut the radishes and cucumbers into bite size pieces. 

3. Place your dips into serving bowls with spoons/forks. 

4. If using lettuce or cabbage leaves as a garnishment, lay these embellishments flat so that you can add the vegetables on top of them. You should allow for some of the leaves to hang off of the board. 

5. Using a large food safe board, place your vegetables onto the board in sections. I like to place the vegetables equal distance from each other alternating shapes and textures. For example, alternate circular vegetables with strip vegetables. 

6. Add the dipping sauces to the board in between the vegetables. 

7. Add any additional garnishments. 

8. Keep appetizer board refrigerated until ready to serve! 

FAQ

What is the best type of board to use? 

I like to use a round wooden board when serving charcuterie boards. I find that the round board is the most visually appealing. However, rectangular boards are good because they are often larger and can fit more snacks!  

How many vegetables should I include if hosting a large crowd? How many should I use for a small crowd? 

As a good rule of thumb, I like to include at least 4 vegetables for a large crowd and 3 for a small crowd. This allows your guests to have good options and a variety of flavors. I always choose vegetables that are in season, have multiple colors and a variety of textures. 

Where does the word charcuterie come from and how do I pronounce it? 

Charcuterie is a French word that translates to ‘deli’ in English. It is pronounced shar-ku-teri-i with an emphasis on the ku. In a traditional description, this veggie board is not a charcuterie board because it does not contain the meat products that a traditional charcuterie board would use. This is the vegetarian spin on charcuterie! 

Can I make a themed veggie charcuterie board for the holidays? 

Holiday veggie charcuterie boards are my favorite! They are always a big hit and a great option for something healthy at holidays. Here are some fun ideas:

  • For Christmas, build a veggie charcuterie board in the shape of a Christmas tree. 
  • Make a spooky jack-o-lantern using a round board, lots of carrots and orange peppers and figs for the eyes! 
  • Build a veggie turkey for Thanksgiving. Here is the one that I attempt to make every year! 

Expert Tips

  • Have a small board and a larger board so that you can make this board for large dinner parties or a simple date night at home. 
  • If you have kids, veggie boards are a great dinner appetizer! Make a small board with their favorite vegetables and serve before dinner. It is the best way to keep their appetites at bay, eliminate junk food and get extra veggies in their diets (trust me!). 
  • Need a quick dinner? Build a board! It is the easiest way to clean to out your refrigerator and pantry. Be sure to add some protein to the board if eating it as your main course. Protein can be found in a Greek yogurt dip, nuts, vegan meats, traditional charcuterie meat or a variety of cheeses. 

Looking for more Veggie Based Dishes?


Try these Mouthwatering Cauliflower Poppers. These poppers could be confused with traditional buffalo chicken wings but in a vegetable form! These are perfect for a vegetarian game day appetizer. 

Or try this Roasted Vegetable Buddha Bowl. This is easily one of my favorite recipes and a go to when meal prepping. The best part about it is you can use whatever vegetables you have on hand and it is a fun way to mix up your meals. 

I hope that you are inspired to make a Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board at home. If you have found inspiration or have any fun tips and tricks, please leave a comment below or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes in your creation. 

Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board with all of the veggies and dips
Print Recipe

How To Build a Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board

How To Build A Simple Veggie Charcuterie Board gives you tips and tricks to build the most epic veggie charcuterie board that meat eaters, vegetarians and vegans will love!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Sharp Knife
  • Cutting Board
  • Large Food-Safe Serving Board
  • Small Bowls for dips
  • Small Spoons/Knives for dips

Ingredients

  • Bell Pepper Slices
  • Cucumber Slice
  • Carrot Sticks
  • Celery Sticks
  • Sugar Snap Peas
  • Radishes
  • Hummus
  • Ranch Dip
  • Guacamole
  • Tzatziki Sauce

Instructions

  • Wash all ingredients and dry them.
  • Slice into sticks or bite size pieces for easy consumption.
  • Place all dips into bowls with spoons/knives if necessary.
  • Place all sauces on the serving platter. Arrange vegetables around sauces in groups.
  • Refrigerate until ready to serve.

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes, Summer Recipes

Blood Orange Tea Sangria

May 16, 2023 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Blood Orange Tea Sangria with orange halves, loose leaf tea, sugar and strawberries

Blood Orange Tea Sangria is made with fresh brewed Blood Orange Iced Tea, a homemade Orange Honey simple syrup and white wine. Top this drink with fresh fruit for the ultimate refreshing summer cocktail.

Blood Orange Tea Sangria with orange halves

Summer is the time for sipping iced tea outside or enjoying a cocktail on the patio. Why not combine refreshing iced tea with a white wine for a light, slightly sweet cocktail?

This Blood Orange Tea Sangria pairs perfectly with these Easy Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Proscuitto. If you are looking for another light and cooling drink, try this Refreshing Cucumber Cocktail with Mint and Lime. With the option to make it into a mocktail, this drink can be enjoyed by everyone!

Jump to:
  • Ingredients
  • Instructions
  • Substitutions
  • Variations
  • Equipment
  • Storage
  • Top tip
  • FAQ
  • Similar Recipes
  • Blood Orange Tea Sangria

Ingredients

Use just a few ingredients to make a delicious pitcher of Blood Orange Tea Sangria! –

  • Brewed Blood Orange Iced Tea- get the tea from Coffee Rendezbrew here!
  • White Wine- use a wine that you like. I tested this recipe with Riesling and Pinot Gris.
  • Blood Oranges- to infuse flavor into the tea sangria and to use as garnishes. If you can’t get blood oranges, use Cara Cara oranges
  • Sugar- you can use regular white sugar or try Sister’s Sunshine Sugar from Coffee Rendezbrew!
  • Honey- substitute agave nectar or more sugar in place of honey.
  • Water
  • Strawberries- substitute raspberries if you don’t have strawberries. Fresh or frozen can be used.

Instructions

  1. Start by brewing the Blood Orange Tea overnight. Place the tea bag in a quart of water. Refrigerate overnight. Discard tea bag.
  2. Make the Orange Honey Simple Syrup. Add sugar, water, honey, blood orange and strawberries to a small pot over medium heat. Stir to dissolve the sugar. Turn the heat up to bring to a boil. Once boiling, reduce the heat and allow the syrup to simmer for 10 minutes. Remove from heat. Let syrup thicken and cool (about 20 minutes). Using a strainer, press down on the oranges and strawberries to release all of the juice into the syrup. Store refrigerated.
  3. In a large pitcher, combine the tea, wine and Orange Honey Simple Syrup. Stir to combine.
  4. Add orange slices to the sangria. Refrigerate for at least an hour prior to serving.
  5. Serve garnished with blood oranges and strawberries.

Hint: Make the Orange Honey Simple Syrup ahead of time and make extra! You can use this to sweeten individual glasses of tea or to put on top of muffins, ice cream, you name it!

A glass of Blood Orange Tea Sangria with an orange slice and Sunrise Sugar in the background.

Substitutions

As the recipe is written, this Blood Orange Tea Sangria is naturally vegetarian and dairy free. It is not vegan.

To make this Tea Sangria vegan, replace the honey with sugar or agave nectar.

If you want to make this Tea Sangria into a mocktail, omit the wine and add white grape juice to taste.

Variations

Try these fun variations on Tea Sangria:

  • Less Sweet – to make this recipe less sweet, use less Orange Honey Simple Syrup.
  • Different Fruit- The Orange Honey Simple Syrup uses strawberries. Substitute the strawberries with raspberries, blackberries or cranberries.
  • Mocktail Version- Remove the wine and substitute with white grape juice. Be careful when adding the grape juice as it is sweet. Add the grape juice to taste.
  • Make it rosé! Substitute the white wine with a rosé wine for the best of summer taste!

Equipment

It doesn’t take much to make Blood Orange Tea Sangria!

  • Small Pot to make the simple syrup
  • A large pitcher
  • Loose Leaf Tea Filters- buy one here! These are great if you are brewing tea at home often!

Storage

Store Tea Sangria covered and refrigerated. Sangria is best served 12-24 hours after it is made. Sangria will keep in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

If serving sangria, over a day later, remove any mushy fruit and replace with fresh fruit.

Top tip

Serve in a cute wine glass over ice. Garnish with blood orange slices inside the glass and strawberries on the rim of the glass.

FAQ

What does Blood Orange Tea Sangria taste like?

Blood Orange Tea Sangria tastes like an herby tea flavor that is sweetened with orange in the tea and simple syrup. The wine adds in a tang. This Tea Sangria has a slightly sweet, refreshing taste.

Is Tea Sangria strong?

No, Tea Sangria is not strong. This cocktail is made with a bottle of wine and a quart of tea. You are drinking roughly a half glass of wine with each glass of this tea sangria. If you want to make this tea less strong, use less wine and more tea.

Does Tea Sangria have caffeine?

Yes, Tea Sangria does have caffeine. The tea that I chose to use has caffeine in it. If you choose a non-caffeinated tea in your sangria, the drink would not contain caffeine.

Similar Recipes

Here are some additional, fun cocktails and mocktails for all of your entertaining!

  • A glass dish with creamy key lime pie dip, topped with toasted coconut flakes, three fresh lime slices, and three vanilla wafer cookies on one side.
    Key Lime Pie Dessert Dip (No Bake Recipe)
  • Seven blueberry banana muffins on a wire cooling rack, surrounded by purple flowers. A small blue bowl filled with fresh blueberries is in the background. The golden-brown muffins are studded with visible blueberries, creating a delicious fusion of flavors and textures.
    Easy Blueberry Banana Cottage Cheese Muffins
  • Yes, you can make this casserole ahead of time. Simply assemble the casserole, cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate. Remove the casserole from the refrigerator and let it come to room temperature while the oven preheats. You may need to add a few minutes of cooking time to ensure that the casserole is heated thoroughly.
    Sweet Potato and Chorizo Breakfast Casserole
  • A Strawberry Basil Gin Smash garnished with strawberries, lemon wedges and basil leaves.
    Strawberry Basil Smash (Gin Cocktail Recipe)
Print Recipe

Blood Orange Tea Sangria

Blood Orange Tea Sangria is made with fresh brewed Blood Orange Iced Tea, a homemade Orange Honey simple syrup and white wine. Top this drink with fresh fruit for the ultimate refreshing summer cocktail.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: cocktail
Cuisine: American
Servings: 5
Calories: 173kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Small pot
  • Pitcher

Ingredients

  • 1 qt Blood Orange Iced Tea- brewed
  • 1 bottle Riesling or other white wine
  • 1/2 cup Orange Honey Simple Syrup
  • Orange Slices

Orange Honey Simple Syrup

  • 1/4 cup White Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Honey
  • 1/2 cup Water
  • 1 Blood Orange- sliced
  • 3/4 cup Strawberries- chopped

Instructions

  • Start by brewing the Blood Orange Tea overnight. Discard tea bag.
  • To the tea pitcher, add white wine and Orange Honey Simple Syrup. Stir to combine.
  • Add Blood Orange slices. Refrigerate for an hour or up to overnight.
  • Serve over ice with orange slices.

Orange Honey Simple Syrup

  • Add all ingredients to a small pot over medium heat. Stir to allow the sugar to dissolve.
  • Turn the heat up and bring to a boil. Once boiling, turn heat down to a simmer. Allow syrup to simmer for 10 minutes.
  • Remove from heat and let syrup thicken and cool (about 20 minutes).
  • Using a strainer, press down on the oranges and strawberries to release all of the juices into the syrup.
  • Store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 5g | Calories: 173kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 0.2g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.004g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 29mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 0.5g | Sugar: 44g | Vitamin A: 8IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Recipes, Spring Recipes, Summer Recipes

Peppermint Mocha Latte with Peppermint Simple Syrup

November 28, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

A delicious Peppermint Mocha Latte with Christmas cookies, red flowers and coffee beans

A Peppermint Mocha Latte with Peppermint Simple Syrup is a delicious holiday coffee that you can make year-round at home! With flavors of chocolate and mint, this latte tastes like Christmas!

 

Can you believe Christmas is less than a month away? If you are trying to get in the Christmas spirit, I have the perfect drink for you. This Peppermint Mocha Latte tastes like it is from Starbucks or Dunkin Donuts. Warm, chocolately with a hint of mint, you (and Santa) will love this holiday coffee.

 

Looking for a boozy coffee option? Try this Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup. Made with cold brew, a homemade simple syrup and bourbon, this is truly a refreshing coffee cocktail for the busiest of Christmas days. Need a different latte flavor? Try this delicious Warm Apple Pie Latte. Sweetened with apple butter and maple syrup, this latte tastes like a homemade slice of apple pie in a glass!

 

Delicious Peppermint Mocha Lattes with Christmas flowers, cookies and spilled coffee beans

Coffee Drink Details

Level of Difficulty: Easy! Prepare the simple syrup ahead of time. Brew your coffee or espresso. Warm your milk. Mix everything together and you have a Peppermint Mocha Latte!

Flavor: This holiday coffee tastes like a Peppermint Pattie. It is the perfect mix of chocolate, peppermint and caffeine.

Time: If you prepare the Peppermint Simple Syrup ahead of time, it will take about 5 minutes to mix this latte. The Peppermint Simple Syrup takes about 10 minutes to prepare and then requires time to cool.

 

Ingredients and Substitutions: Latte & Peppermint Simple Syrup

  • Espresso or Strongly Brewed Coffee: If you do not have an espresso maker, brew your coffee on the ‘Strong’ setting. I like to use the Lewes Beach Roast from Coffee Rendezbrew. The chocolate flavor in the coffee enhances the mocha flavor.
  • Chocolate Almond Milk: If you do not have pre-made Chocolate Almond Milk, make your own! Add chocolate syrup to any kind of milk until you are satisfied with the chocolatey taste.
  • Peppermint Simple Syrup 
  • Espresso Powder: This ingredient is optional. Adding a little espresso powder to the latte enhances the coffee flavor.
  • White Sugar
  • Mint Flavored Sugar: This ingredient is also optional but adds a little extra mint flavor to the latte. I like to use this Mint To Be Sugar. 
  • Water
  • Peppermint Extract: Find this in the baking aisle.

 

Let’s Make This Holiday Coffee At Home!

  1. Brew the espresso or coffee. If making coffee, remember to choose the ‘Strong’ option on your coffee maker.
  2. Stir the Peppermint Simple Syrup into your coffee.
  3. Heat the Chocolate Almond Milk over low heat or add to the microwave for 1 minute. If using espresso powder, stir the powder into the milk.
  4. Once Chocolate Almond Milk is warm, pour half of the milk over the espresso or coffee.
  5. Using a handheld frother, froth the remaining milk until double in size and pour on top of latte.
  6. Enjoy!

 

Santa's Treat! A Peppermint Mocha Latte with Christmas Cookies!

How to Make Peppermint Simple Syrup

Peppermint Simple Syrup is used to give the latte it’s mint flavor. Simple Syrup is very easy to make at home and is basically sugar water that has been thickened into a syrup. It can be flavored with different extracts, syrups or even nuts! Here is how to make Peppermint Simple Syrup at home.

  1. Add white sugar and the mint flavored sugar (if using) to a small pot on the stove. Turn heat to medium and mix together the sugars and water.
  2. Bring to a boil. Once boiling, turn the heat down to a simmer. Allow to simmer for 10 minutes until the syrup thickens.
  3. Add the peppermint extract. Stir in and allow to simmer for one more minute.
  4. Remove from heat. Allow the syrup to cool.
  5. Store refrigerated in an airtight container.

 

Peppermint Mocha Latte toppings

All good holiday coffees need good toppings! Top your Peppermint Mocha Latte with:

  • Whipped Cream! You could even make a peppermint flavored whipped cream at home by adding some peppermint extract to homemade whipped cream.
  • Chocolate Syrup! All mocha lattes need more chocolate, right?
  • Crushed Candy Canes! Crushed candy canes add a little zest, pizzazz and peppermint flavoring to your latte
  • What will you top your latte with?!

What is a Mocha Latte?

A mocha latte is a latte that is contains chocolate syrup. In this Peppermint Mocha Latte, we use Chocolate Almond Milk to get the mocha flavor.

 

Make a Skinny Peppermint Mocha Latte

To make this is a ‘Skinny’ or ‘Healthy’ Peppermint Mocha Latte, use Unsweetened Almond Milk instead of Chocolate Almond Milk and add chocolate syrup to the milk. You can measure the syrup to be sure that you are sticking to the serving size. To keep the latte skinny, do not top with whipped cream or chocolate syrup.

 

Make it Iced!

To make an Iced Peppermint Mocha Latte, simply let the coffee or espresso come to room temperature or chill in the refrigerator. Do not heat the Chocolate Almond Milk. Add all ingredients to a large cup with ice and enjoy!

 

What to Serve with a latte

I would love to enjoy this holiday coffee with cookies! Try one of these recipes:

 

  • Roll Out Butter Cookies: The classic Christmas butter cookie! This cookie is rolled thin, made into fun shapes, decorated and baked. These cookies have been my Christmas tradition forever.
  • Classic Peanut Butter Cookies: Peanut butter and chocolate go together hand in hand! Use the Peppermint Mocha Latte to wash down these thin, crunchy peanut butter cookies.

Overhead shot of Peppermint Mocha Lattes topped with whipped cream, chocolate syrup and crushed candy canes.

 

If you make this recipe, please leave a comment or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Delicious Peppermint Mocha Lattes with Christmas flowers, cookies and spilled coffee beans
Print Recipe

Peppermint Mocha Latte

A Peppermint Mocha Latte with Peppermint Simple Syrup is a delicious holiday coffee that you can make year-round at home! With flavors of chocolate and mint, this latte tastes like Christmas!
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: coffee
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 223kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Coffee Mug
  • 1 Coffee/Espresso Maker
  • 1 Small pot
  • 1 Handheld Frother

Ingredients

  • 1/3 cup Espresso or Strongly Brewed Coffee
  • 1 cup Chocolate Almond Milk
  • 1-2 tbsp Peppermint Simple Syrup
  • 1/2 tsp Espresso Powder Optional

Peppermint Simple Syrup

  • 1 cup White Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Mint Flavored Sugar Optional
  • 1 cup Water
  • 1/2 tsp Peppermint Extract

Instructions

  • Add espresso or strongly roasted coffee to a mug.
  • Stir desired amount of Peppermint Simple Syrup into espresso or coffee.
  • Heat Almond Chocolate Milk in a small pot over medium low heat. Add espresso powder (if using) to milk and stir to combine.
  • Once warm, pour half of the milk on top of coffee.
  • Steam or froth remaining milk. Add to the top of the latte.
  • Top with whipped cream and chocolate syrup drizzles.

Peppermint Simple Syrup

  • Add both sugars and water to a small pot over medium heat.
  • Bring to a boil. Lower heat and allow mixture to simmer.
  • Simmer for 5 minutes until sugars are combined and the syrup thickens.
  • Add peppermint extract. Let simmer for 1 minute.
  • Remove from heat and let cool. Store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 223kcal | Carbohydrates: 42g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 185mg | Potassium: 551mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 490IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 327mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Recipes, Winter Recipes

Warm Apple Pie Latte

November 18, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Warm Apple Pie Latte with Cinnamon Sticks and extra apples

This Warm Apple Pie Latte is a delicious holiday coffee that you can make at home! This vegan latte is flavored with cinnamon, maple and reminiscent of a warm apple pie. A perfect alternative to pumpkin spice!

 

‘Tis the season for high calorie and expensive coffee drinks from Starbucks and Dunkin Donuts. While I love a drive through coffee, I also love to make delicious lattes at home. Not only are they inexpensive, I can also control the sugars (something that we need during the holidays!). This Apple Pie Latte is a delicious holiday coffee you can make in the comfort of your home.

 

Need another festive holiday coffee? Try this Peppermint Mocha Latte with Peppermint Simple Syrup. It tastes like a Peppermint Pattie in a cup! Want to up your at home coffee game? Try this Peanut Butter Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping). Pair it with a chocolate flavored coffee and it will taste like a peanut butter cup! Need a coffee cocktail? This Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup with bourbon is a sweet caffeinated cocktail.

 

Apple Pie Latte with fall leaves, coffee beans and red apples

 

Coffee Drink Details

Level of Difficulty: Simple! This latte requires brewing coffee or espresso and heating milk on the stove!

Flavor: Warm cinnamon, maple and sweet apple.

Time: You can make this Apple Pie Latte in 5 minutes. The same amount of time it takes to drive through your local coffee shop!

 

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Coffee or Espresso: If using regular coffee, I recommend strongly brewing the coffee.
  • Milk: I recommend using a non-dairy milk. If using dairy milk, the milk can curdle due to the acidity from the apple butter. I have tested this recipe with Oat Milk and Almond Milk and prefer Oat Milk. The Oat Milk is thicker and it’s consistency resembles dairy milk.
  • Apple Butter: I like to purchase Apple Butter at my local farmer’s markets in the fall. Delaware locals, I purchased Apple Butter this year at Byler’s. They carry an excellent Pumpkin Butter as well!
  • Maple Syrup: Use real maple syrup not pancake syrup.
  • Cinnamon Stick: The cinnamon stick gives the latte the apple pie flavor.
  • Maple Nut Sugar: This sugar accentuates the maple flavor. I love purchasing flavored sugars from Coffee Rendezbrew. Buy the Maple Nut Sugar here! If you can’t get Maple Nut Sugar, substitute brown sugar.
  • Whipped Cream and Caramel Sauce: These toppings are optional but highly recommended!

 

Let’s Make a Holiday Coffee at Home!

  1. Start by brewing your coffee or espresso. If using coffee, brew your coffee using the ‘Strong’ setting.
  2. Add Oat Milk, Apple Butter, Maple Syrup, Cinnamon Stick and Maple Nut Sugar (if using) to a small pot on the stove. Turn heat to low.
  3. Whisk ingredients to mix. Warm milk but do not boil. Allow flavors to steep together for at least 5 minutes.
  4. Remove cinnamon stick. Add milk to a tall glass or mixing cup.
  5. Using a handheld frother, froth milk for about 30 seconds until liquid is close to double in volume.
  6. Pour coffee into a mug. Top with milk blend.
  7. Add whipped cream and/or caramel sauce.
  8. Enjoy!

 

Apple Pie Latte with red apple, cinnamon stick, fall laves and coffee beans

 

What Kind of Coffee should I use?

Most importantly, use a coffee flavor that you like. I like to use Coffee Rendezbrew’s The Jones’ Brew. This coffee is flavored with sweet cinnamon and hazelnuts. The flavors compliment the sweet apple flavors used in this Apple Pie Latte! Check out The Jone’s Brew Here! 

 

How to Make it Iced

To make this Apple Pie Latte Iced, brew the coffee or espresso and either refrigerate or allow to come to room temperature. Warm the milk and blend in the flavors. Let milk cool. Add ice to a tall glass. Pour coffee and milk mixture over ice. Drink cold.

What is Apple Butter

Apple Butter is a very concentrated applesauce. Despite the name, apple butter does not contain butter. It is spreadable like butter and is a healthy and flavorful alternative to fattening butter.

Is Apple Butter good with Milk?

Apple Butter gives a sweet flavor to milk. However, the apple butter can cause dairy milk to curdle. I recommend using a dairy milk alternative such as Oat Milk or Almond Milk.

Is an Apple Pie Latte Vegan?

Yes, this Apple Pie Latte is vegan. Be sure to verify that you are using 100% Real Maple Syrup to keep this latte vegan.

 

Can I make this latte boozy?

Sure thing! Give this holiday coffee an extra kick by adding Bailey’s or an Apple Infused Vodka. If using Bailey’s, omit the Maple Nut Sugar as the liqueur will add extra sugar.

What to eat with this Apple Pie Latte?

Serve this Warm Apple Pie Latte with a Peach Baked Oatmeal for a fruit flavored breakfast. Or, make this Ricotta Quiche ahead of time for a simple and delicious brunch!

 

Apple Pie Latte shot overhead with frothy milk topping

As always, if you make this Apple Pie Latte, please leave a comment or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram. I hope that you enjoy this holiday coffee as much as my family does!

 

Apple Pie Latte with fall leaves, coffee beans and red apples
Print Recipe

Warm Apple Pie Latte

This Warm Apple Pie Latte is a delicious holiday coffee that you can make at home! This vegan latte is flavored with cinnamon, maple and reminiscent of a warm apple pie. A perfect alternative to pumpkin spice!
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: coffee
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 255kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Ingredients

  • 4 oz Espresso or Strongly Brewed Coffee
  • 8 oz Oat Milk
  • 2 tbsp Apple Butter
  • 1 tbsp Maple Syrup
  • 1 Cinnamon Stick
  • 1 tsp Maple Nut Suar Optional
  • Whipped Cream, Caramel Sauce for topping

Instructions

  • Add milk, apple butter, maple syrup and cinnamon stick to a small pot on the stove. Turn heat to low. Whisk ingredients to combine. Allow milk to warm but not boil. Let milk warm for 5 minutes.
  • Add espresso or coffee to mug.
  • Remove cinnamon stick from milk. Pour milk into a tall glass. Froth milk using a handheld frother.
  • Pour milk on top of coffee.
  • Top with whipped cream or caramel sauce.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 255kcal | Carbohydrates: 55g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 132mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 490IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 395mg | Iron: 2mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam

November 14, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, nuts and pear jam

Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam is a decadent yet simple appetizer. This impressive appetizer is baked in a premade crescent roll and is perfect for happy hour!

 

Cherry Tomato Toast with Honey Whipped Ricotta is another easy and impressive appetizer. The sweet ricotta cheese balances the tomatoes to make a delicious bite sized treat.

 

With the holidays here, I am all about an easy and cheesy appetizer. This Pear Baked Brie is beautiful to serve, delicious and most of all super simple to make! Add some fresh fruit, nuts and crackers to a cheese board and have an impressive appetizer!

Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, and pear jam

 

What is Brie Cheese?

Brie Cheese is made from cow’s milk. The soft cheese is held in place by an edible rind. Brie has a creamy and buttery flavor that pairs well with fresh fruit, jam, dried fruit and soft bread.

 

Pear Baked Brie Details

Flavor: Sweet ! This Brie is paired with caramelized pears and fig jam giving it a sweet, buttery flavor.

Level of Difficulty: Medium due to caramelizing the pears. This is an extra step but so worth it! Other than caramelizing the pears, you are simply assembling the brie and baking.

Time: From start to finish, this Pear Baked Brie will take around 35 minutes. 20 minutes of that is bake time.

 

Ingredients & Substitutions

  • Crescent Roll Dough: Use the pre-made dough in a tube. You can find this in the refrigerated aisle at your grocery store. If substituting, use a puff pastry. Note, using a puff pastry will affect the baking time. This recipe uses puff pastry and is delicious!
  • Pear Jam: The Pear Jam pairs well with the caramelized pears. If pear jam is unavailable, use another fresh jam such as fig, apricot or blackberry.
  • Pear: If fresh pears are unavailable, substitute an apple. Honeygold, Gala and Fiji Apples work well. Be sure to have additional sliced fruit for serving!
  • Salted Butter
  • Brown Sugar
  • Cinnamon
  • Brie Cheese Round
  • Egg: Substitute egg whites or use water.

 

Pear Baked Brie Ingredients: pears, butter, brown sugar, cinnamon, pear jam, brie. Note, crescent rolls are not photographed.
Crescent Rolls not photographed.

 

How To Make

  1. Start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Caramelize the pears. To a small pan, melt the butter. Mix in the brown sugar and cinnamon. Add the sliced pears and mix with the butter mixture. Allow pears to simmer for about 5 minutes stirring often. Let cool.
  3. Prep the crescent rolls. Remove the crescent rolls from tube and break into two squares. Squeeze the seams together.
  4. Spread the jam. Spread pear jam onto one of the crescent roll squares.
  5. Add the brie. After slicing off the top of the brie rind, place the brie on top of the pear jam.
  6. Add the pears. Place caramelized pears on top of the brie.
  7. Seal the brie. Place the remaining crescent rolls square on top of the brie. Seal the crescent roll seams together.
  8. Use egg wash. In a small bowl, beat the egg to combine. Brush the egg wash on top of the crescent roll.
  9. Bake. Bake the brie for about 20 minutes until the crescent roll becomes golden.
  10. Enjoy! Allow the brie to cool. Serve warm.

 

Expert Tips

  • Use parchment paper on your baking sheet. This will save the brie and crescent roll from sticking to the pan and will allow you to easily transfer the brie to a serving tray.
  • Leave the crescent rolls in the refrigerator until you are ready to use them. If they become too warm, the rolls will stick together and you will have difficulty spreading them out.
  • Seal the seams of the crescent rolls before adding the jam and brie. This will prevent the jam and brie from oozing out.

What To Serve with Baked Brie

This Baked Brie makes a delicious appetizer! Serve this brie with:

  • Fruit: Use pear slices, apples and grapes. These fruits pair well with the brie and add a healthy touch to a cheese board.
  • Jam: Serve any remaining jam on the side.
  • Nuts: To add a salty element, add some almonds the board.
  • Crostini or Crackers

 

Pear Baked Brie with brie oozing out of crescent roll and sliced pears for serving

Can you eat the Cheese Rind?

Yes, you can eat the cheese rind on the brie. I recommend removing the top of the rind when baking as this allows the brie to bubble and become melty. Keep the sides and bottom of the rind on as this will keep the brie in place and prevent it from oozing everywhere.

 

Need a drink to go with your cheese?

If you are taking this to a happy hour, pair this appetizer with this Simple Peach Sangria with Rose Wine or these Party Cosmopolitans! Both drink recipes make a batch to share.

 

If you make this Pear Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam, be sure to leave a review and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes!

Pear Baked Brie with sliced pears, sliced apples, almonds, grapes, and pear jam
Print Recipe

Pear Baked Brie (with Caramelized Pears and Jam)

Baked Brie with Caramelized Pears and Jam is a decadent yet simple appetizer. This impressive appetizer is baked in a premade crescent roll and is perfect for happy hour!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 162kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Baking Sheet
  • 1 Sharp Knife
  • Parchment Paper
  • Saute Pan

Ingredients

  • 1 8 oz Tube Crescent Roll Dough
  • 4 tbsp Pear Jam
  • 1 Pear Sliced plus more for serving
  • 1 tbsp Salted Butter
  • 1 tbsp Brown Sugar
  • 1/4 tsp Cinnamon
  • 8 oz Brie Cheese Round
  • 1 Egg Beaten

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees. Put parchment paper on a baking pan.
  • Place small pan on stove and turn heat to medium. Add butter and allow to melt. Stir in brown sugar and cinnamon.
  • Add sliced pears to pan. Mix pears with butter mixture. Allow pears to simmer for 5 minutes stirring often. Pears should be soft. Remove from heat.
  • Remove crescent roll from tube and roll out. Split into 2 large squares (4 triangles in each square).
  • Spread pear jam onto one of the crescent roll squares.
  • Cut top of rind off of brie. Place brie on top of pear jam.
  • Place pears on top of brie.
  • Put other crescent roll square on top of brie. Seal top and bottom crescent roll together.
  • Break egg into a small bowl and whisk to combine. Brush egg on top of crescent roll.
  • Bake for 20 minutes until crescent roll is golden. Serve brie warm.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 162kcal | Carbohydrates: 12g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 53mg | Sodium: 191mg | Potassium: 87mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 247IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Fall Recipes, Recipes, Side Dishes

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with Rice and Vegetables

November 7, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with rice, mushrooms, carrots, apples and cranberry sauce on a serving platter

This Dutch Oven Turkey Breast is cooked in one pot with vegetables, rice, apple cider and fresh herbs for a complete meal! This turkey breast dinner is perfect if you are hosting a holiday dinner for a small crowd.

Looking for another warm dinner option? Try this Red Wine Beef Stew. This meal is prepared quickly and cooked in the slow cooker to make a hearty dish with robust flavor! Need a holiday side dish? This Easy Brussels Sprout Salad is perfect for a holiday meal. It adds a green vegetable to the table, is tasty and, most importantly, can be prepared ahead of time!

This Turkey Breast cooked in a Dutch oven is the perfect meal if you are hosting a small Thanksgiving or holiday dinner. The turkey breast cooks with onion, mushrooms, carrots, apples and rice flavored with apple cider. Your main course, vegetables and starches are all cooked in one pot at the same time. Can it get much easier?

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast on platter with rice, mushrooms, carrots, apples and cranberry sauce

What is the difference between a turkey breast and a turkey?

A turkey breast is simply just the turkey breast instead of the entire turkey. A turkey breast is a good option when hosting a small holiday dinner. By cooking the turkey breast in the Dutch oven, the turkey breast stays moist and cooks quickly.

What is a Dutch Oven?

A Dutch Oven is a heavy cooking pot with a tight fitting lid. The pot is often made of enameled cast iron. A Dutch Oven is very versatile as you can use it on the stove and then transfer directly into the oven. Here is the Lodge Dutch Oven I use!

Turkey Breast Details

Level of Difficulty: Medium. While this recipe is not hard to make, you do have to watch the turkey closely to make sure that it does not overcook. You also have to monitor and time the rice and vegetables.

Flavor: This turkey breast is flavored with fresh herbs, salt, pepper and EVOO. This results in a turkey breast that is moist with a light, herby flavor. The rice and vegetables have a slightly sweet flavor from the apple cider.

Time: This turkey breast requires about 15 minutes of prep time (chopping, stuffing the turkey, sauteing) and an hour of cook time for a total of an hour and fifteen minutes.

Ingredients & Substitutions

  • Turkey Breast
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: substitute unsalted butter.
  • Lemon: lemon juice and zest are used.
  • Parsley, Sage and Chives: use a combination of fresh herbs that you have on hand. I also like to use thyme and rosemary.
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Salt
  • Pepper
  • White Onion
  • Carrots: use baby carrots or large carrots.
  • Mushrooms
  • Apples
  • Brown Basmati Rice: substitute white basmati rice.
  • Apple Cider: if you do not have apple cider, use more chicken broth. This will result in a less sweet dish.
  • Chicken Broth: substitute vegetable broth.

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast Ingredients: turkey breast, apples, sage, parsley, chives, lemon, rice, carrots, mushrooms, apple cider, salt, pepper, extra virgin olive oil, turkey breast and broth

How To Make Turkey Breast in a Dutch Oven

  1. Start by preheating the oven to 350 degrees. Place the Dutch Oven on the stove.
  2. Remove turkey breast from packaging. Using a paper towel, pat your turkey dry to remove excess moisture.
  3. Add EVOO, herbs (sage, parsley and chives), the juice from a lemon, lemon zest, minced garlic, salt and pepper to a small bowl. Mix to combine.
  4. Make a small cut in the turkey’s skin. Spread the EVOO mixture under the turkey’s skin and inside the turkey cavity.
  5. Turn stovetop to medium heat. Heat 1 tablespoon EVOO in the Dutch Oven.
  6. Once EVOO is hot, add brown rice and stir to coat with EVOO. Add carrots, onion, mushrooms and apples. Stir to mix together.
  7. Add Chicken Broth and Apple Cider. Stir to combine.
  8. Push rice and vegetables to the side of the Dutch Oven. Place turkey in the center.
  9. Place lid entirely on top of Dutch Oven. Bake for 1 hour or until turkey reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees.
  10. Allow turkey to rest for 15 minutes before slicing.

What to serve with Turkey Breast

While this recipe provides a complete meal, here are some ideas for extras to go with your turkey breast:

  • Cranberry Sauce 
  • Corn Bread
  • Warm gravy 
  • Easy Brussels Sprout Salad– this crunchy green side dish goes perfectly with a holiday turkey and can be prepped ahead of time!

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast on a plate with rice, mushrooms, carrots and garnished with greens

Expert Tips

  • Make sure your turkey is fully thawed.
  • Pat turkey with a paper towel to remove excess moisture from the skin. This will help the turkey skin to become crispy while cooking.
  • Make sure that the lid is completely on and snug to the pot. If the lid is not snug, the vegetables and rice will not cook properly.
  • If your turkey pops or reaches 165 degrees before the rice and vegetables are finished cooking, remove the turkey from the Dutch Oven and allow the turkey to rest. Place Dutch Oven back in the oven and cook until the rice is tender and the liquid is absorbed.

If you make this Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with Rice and Vegetables, please leave a review or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast on platter with rice, mushrooms, carrots, apples and cranberry sauce
Print Recipe

Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with Rice and Vegetables

This Dutch Oven Turkey Breast with Rice and Vegetables cooks in one pot and is a complete meal to serve to a small crowd on Thanksgiving!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr
Total Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 466kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Dutch Oven
  • 1 Sharp Knife
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • 1 Zester
  • 1 Juicer

Ingredients

  • 1 4-6 pound Turkey Breast Bone In and Skin On
  • 1/2 cup Extra Virgin Olive Oil plus 1 Tablespoon
  • 1 Lemon Zest and Juice
  • 2 tbsp Parsley
  • 1 tbsp Sage
  • 1 tbsp Chives
  • 4 cloves Garlic Minced
  • 2 tsp Kosher Salt
  • 1 tsp Black Pepper
  • 1 White Onion Chopped
  • 1 cup Carrots Chopped
  • 1 cup White Mushrooms Sliced
  • 2 Apples Sliced
  • 2 cups Brown Basmati Rice
  • 2 cups Chicken Broth
  • 2 cups Apple Cider

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees.
  • Remove turkey from packaging. Remove any excess water. Pat turkey dry with paper towels.
  • Add EVOO, lemon juice, lemon zest, parsley, sage, chives, garlic, salt and pepper to a small bowl. Whisk ingredients together.
  • Make a small slice into the turkey skin. Rub marinade liberally under the turkey skin. Set turkey aside.
  • Place Dutch Oven on stove and turn heat to medium. Add 1 tablespoon EVOO and heat.
  • Add rice and stir to coat with EVOO for 1 minute. Add onion, mushrooms, carrots and apples. Stir to mix together.
  • Add chicken broth and apple cider to cover rice and vegetables.
  • Push rice and vegetables to the side of the dutch oven. Place turkey in the middle.
  • Cover dutch oven and place in oven. Bake 1 hour or until turkey reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees.
  • Allow turkey to sit for 15 minutes before slicing.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 63g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 2mg | Sodium: 1.479mg | Potassium: 475mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 3.733IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 2mg

Filed Under: Fall Recipes, Main Course, Recipes

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip (Skillet Dip)

October 6, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Smokey Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, onions, cilantro and chips

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip is your new gameday appetizer! Beans, corn and peppers are mixed with a lightened up cheesy sauce, topped with more cheese and then baked to make a delicious appetizer!

This vegetarian appetizer is not spicy. Instead, it has a smoky flavor thanks to the poblano peppers and chili peppers. This is a dip that the whole family can enjoy!

If you are looking for more gameday appetizers, try my Crispy Old Bay Wings. These wings are baked in the oven and always a winner!

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, red onions, cilantro, chips and beer

The best thing about this Mexican Bean Dip is that it only takes about 10 minutes of hands on time to prepare and uses pantry staple ingredients. Make this dip and take to your next party or tailgate. Everyone loves a cheesy dip and chips!

What is Mexican Bean Dip?

Mexican Bean Dip is a warm appetizer made up of two types of beans, vegetables, cheese and warm spices. It is made on the stove using an oven safe pan and then baked to allow the cheese to melt and the dip to solidify together.

Top the dip with your favorite Mexican inspired toppings! I like to use avocado slices and cilantro. You could use fresh salsa, sour cream or Cotija cheese! The options are endless.

Details

Level of Difficulty: This Bean Dip recipe is simple! Some chopping, sauteing, mixing and baking is involved. All simple tasks, I promise!

Taste: This dip is NOT spicy! This Bean Dip has a smoky and sweet flavor with a creamy texture.

Time: Including prep and bake time, this appetizer takes less than 30 minutes to make!

Ingredient Notes

  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: this is used to sauté the vegetables. Replace with butter if you do not have EVOO.
  • Poblano Peppers: These peppers are mild and slightly sweet when sauteed. Substitute green peppers.
  • Red Onion: Substitute a white onion.
  • Chili Peppers in Adobe Sauce: I use the canned peppers. Find them in the International Section in your grocery store.
  • Corn: 2 ears of fresh corn is best but if you do not have fresh corn, use a can of whole kernel yellow corn or frozen corn.
  • Black Beans: Remember to drain and rinse your beans if using canned beans.
  • White Beans: Substitute Navy Beans or Pinto Beans.
  • Cumin
  • Paprika
  • Salt
  • Black Pepper
  • Garlic Powder
  • Chili Powder
  • Adobe Sauce: This sauce comes directly from the can of peppers. The sauce adds a little heat to the bean dip.
  • Cream Cheese: The cream cheese gives the dip a smooth and creamy consistency.
  • Whole Milk Greek Yogurt: The Greek Yogurt helps to give the dip a creamy consistency with less fat content than cheese. If you do not have Greek Yogurt, use an entire stick of cream cheese or substitute sour cream.
  • Shredded Cheese: I like to use a shredded Mexican cheese or Colby Jack cheese. Substitute your favorite cheese here! Queso and Cotija Cheese are great and authentic options.

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip Ingredients: Cream Cheese, Corn, Chili Peppers, Extra Virgin Olive Oil, Greek Yogurt, Shredded Cheese, Black Beans, White Beans, Red Onion, Poblano Peppers, Cumin, Paprika, Garlic Powder, Chili Powder, Salt and Pepper

Equipment

  • Sharp Knife: A sharp knife will be used to chop the red onion, poblano pepper and chili peppers.
  • Large Cutting Board
  • Can Opener
  • Oven Safe Pan: I love this Lodge Cast Iron Pan. It doubles has two pans or a pan with a lid. You can take this pan directly from the stove to the oven.

How to Make Bean Dip

  1. Chop vegetables. Chop the red onion, poblano peppers and chili peppers into small pieces.
  2. Sauté vegetables. Sauté vegetables on the stove for 5 minutes until they are tender.
  3. Mix ingredients. Add white beans, black beans, corn and seasoning (cumin, paprika, salt, pepper, garlic powder and chili powder). Stir to combine all ingredients.
  4. Stir in soft ingredients. Add cream cheese, Greek yogurt and adobe sauce. Stir to mix together and melt the cheese.
  5. Top with additional cheese. Sprinkle on your favorite cheese.
  6. Bake. Bake until the cheese is melted on top.
  7. Enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Use soft cream cheese. Using soft cream cheese will allow the cheese to fully mix and incorporate with the beans and vegetables.
  • Control the spice level! If your family likes spicy foods, use more chili peppers and adobe sauce. If your family does not like spicy food, use less chili peppers and remove the seeds.
  • Add colorful toppings when serving. A pop of color goes a long way to make a dish appear even more delicious. Top this bean dip with sliced avocado, cilantro, sliced jalapenos or thinly cut radishes.

How to Serve Mexican Bean Dip

  • Serve this dip with tortilla chips or Fritos.
  • For a healthier option, serve with carrots, sliced bell peppers and celery.
  • Make it a meal! Put dip in tortillas and eat as tacos! Serve rice on the side.
  • For a protein packed dish, add ground or shredded chicken. Simply eliminate one of the bean cans and keep the other ingredients the same.

Plate of chips with Smoky Mexican Bean Dip on top with extra chips, avocado, lime, onion and cilantro

Need a drink to go with gameday?

Try one of these:

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)

Chai Cider Whiskey

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

Rate and Comment!

If you make this Smoky Mexican Bean Dip, please leave a rating and a comment or tag on Instagram @delmarvaliciousdishes!

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip with avocados, limes, red onions, cilantro, chips and beer
Print Recipe

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip (Skillet Recipe)

Smoky Mexican Bean Dip is your new gameday appetizer! This vegetarian appetizer has a smokey flavor and comes together in less than 30 minutes!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 308kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Sharp Knife
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • 1 Can Opener
  • 1 Oven Safe Pan

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • 2 Poblano Peppers Chopped
  • 1/2 cup Red Onion Chopped
  • 1-2 Chili Peppers in Adobe Sauce Chopped
  • 15 oz Canned Corn Drained
  • 15 oz Canned Black Beans Drained & Rinsed
  • 15 oz Canned White Beans Drained & Rinsed
  • 1/2 tsp Cumin
  • 1 tsp Paprika
  • 1 tsp Salt
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper
  • 1 tsp Garlic Powder
  • 1/2 tsp Chili Powder
  • 1-2 tsp Adobe Sauce
  • 4 oz Cream Cheese
  • 1/2 cup Whole Milk Greek Yogurt
  • 1 cup Shredded Cheese Cojita, Mexican Blend, Colby Jack

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Add extra virgin olive oil to an oven-safe pan and heat to medium heat.
  • Add poblano peppers, onion and chili peppers. Sauté for 5 minutes until vegetables are tender.
  • Add corn, black beans and white beans. Stir to combine.
  • Sprinkle with cumin, paprika, salt, pepper, garlic powder and chili powder. Stir to mix.
  • Stir in adobe sauce, Greek yogurt and cream cheese until dip is creamy.
  • Sprinkle with cheese. Bake for 10-15 minutes until cheese is hot and bubbly.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 308kcal | Carbohydrates: 32g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.001g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 875mg | Potassium: 596mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 607IU | Vitamin C: 27mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 3mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes, Side Dishes

Peanut Butter Cold Foam (Cold Coffee Topping)

September 28, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 1 Comment

Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used as a coffee topping

Peanut Butter Cold Foam is a nutty and sweet cream topping that goes onto cold coffee drinks. Ready in minutes, it is the perfect cold coffee topping to make at home!

Love cold foam as much as I do? Try this 3 Ingredient Strawberry Cold Foam. This cold coffee topping is perfect to elevate your summer coffee into a sweet treat!

It seems that Cold Coffee (either Cold Brew or Iced Coffee) is all the rage today. Add a sweet, foamy topping that sits perfectly on top of the coffee and you have a picture perfect and delicious cup of joe. If you are sick of standing in the coffee line and spending $$$, try this coffee shop copycat recipe.

Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used on top of coffee

What is Cold Brew?

Cold Brew is coffee that has slowly steeped in cold or room temperature water for a minimum of 12 hours. The coffee grounds are then strained. The coffee can be served chilled, over ice or at room temperature with milk and/or sweetener. This results in a coffee that is smoother and less acidic with more caffeine than regularly brewed coffee.

What is Cold Foam?

Cold Foam is a creamy, dairy topping for cold drinks. This frothy topping is the equivalent of steamed milk that is used on hot drinks except that it is cold and does not melt into your drink. It is made by frothing the dairy into a light and airy layer. This foam layer sits directly on top of your coffee providing a  fun look with a sweet topping.

Cold Foam Details

Level of Difficulty: Simple! After combining the ingredients, it only takes about 30 seconds of frothing to make the perfect cold foam at home.

Flavor: This cold foam has a sweet and nutty taste thanks to the peanut butter powder and sugar.

Time: Making Peanut Butter Cold Foam at home will take you less than 5 minutes!

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Heavy Cream
  • 2% Milk
  • Peanut Butter Powder: Peanut Butter Powder easily blends into the cold foam topping. Using regular peanut butter in the cold foam will result in a rich peanut butter taste but will not provide the cold foam texture. Here is the Peanut Butter Powder I use!
  • Sugar: To enhance the nutty flavors, I used Oh My Pumpkin Spice Sugar. Substitute white or brown sugar.

Dark coffee with thick layer of Peanut Butter Cold Foam

Equipment

  • Large, clear glass or clear jigger
  • Handheld Milk Frother

Frother Alternatives

Help! I don’t have a milk frother. No need to worry. You can use a French press. Simply add your ingredients to the French press and press up and down until you reach your desired cold foam consistency.

Alternatively, use a whisk and bowl. Add ingredients to a small bowl and quickly whisk together until the desired consistency is reached. I found that chilling my bowl for a few minutes in the freezer helps the foam to form quicker.

In my experience, I have achieved the best cold foam texture and consistency in the shortest amount of time using a milk frother. Here is the one that I use.

How To Make

  1. Add ingredients to a tall glass. A cocktail jigger or a mixing glass works well because they have a spout. If you don’t have one of these, use a clear, tall water glass.
  2. Froth ingredients together. Move the frother up and down for about 20 seconds. The volume of the foam will increase as well as the consistency. Froth until volume has almost doubled in size and the foam has a thick and stable consistency. If you froth too long, peaks will begin to form and your cold foam will quickly turn to whipped cream (beware!).
  3. Pour over top of cold brew. You can add ice to your cold brew coffee or simply serve the coffee chilled. Pour the cold foam directly on top of the liquid, see your frothy layer, sip and enjoy!

Other Cold Foam Flavor Combinations

  • Chocolate:  Add mocha powder in place of the powdered peanut butter.
  • Chocolate Peanut Butter: Add mocha powder and the powdered peanut butter (sounds like a Reese’s Cup coffee!).
  • Pumpkin: Add pumpkin pie spices and some real pumpkin puree.
  • The flavor combinations are endless! Simply add some flavored syrup to the milk and heavy cream when frothing to come up with your own, unique cold foam combination.

How To Store

Store cold foam in an airtight container in the refrigerator. If you find that your cold foam has deflated or lost some of its foamy consistency, add cold foam back to glass and froth again.

FAQ

Can I flavor my Cold Foam? Yes, you can flavor your cold foam by using flavored syrups, powders and spices (such as cocoa powder, pumpkin pie spice, etc.).

What else can I put Cold Foam on? Cold foam can also be used on matcha tea, iced hot chocolate or any cold drink. Adding cold foam to a hot drink would result in the cold foam melting into the drink and can be used as creamer.

Do I need ice in my coffee for the Cold Foam to float? No, you do not need to have ice in your coffee for the cold foam to float. The cold foam has a stabilized consistency that allows it to layer directly on your coffee. However, if you like ice in your coffee for an extra chill, add the ice!

Can I make Peanut Butter Chocolate Cold Foam? Yes, simply add cocoa powder to the peanut butter powder to make Peanut Butter Chocolate Cold Foam!

What are other uses for Peanut Butter Powder? Peanut Butter Powder is very popular in smoothies because it adds the peanut butter taste and protein without the extra calories. Peanut Butter Powder can also be used in oatmeal and baking.

Peanut Butter Cold Foam layered on top of coffee

Need More Coffee…

Try one of these delicious coffee recipes:

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup: This boozy coffee is the perfect afternoon pick me up!

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew: If you are not ready for full Pumpkin Spice Latte season, try this coffee. It has all of the nutty and cozy fall flavors but is served cold.

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake: Because we all need some coffee in our milkshake! You can’t go wrong with sweet and refreshing flavor combination.

Iced Chai Matcha Latte: This cold drink combines two of the best tea flavors: matcha and chai! The result is one healthy and tasty latte.

If you make this delicious Peanut Butter Cold Foam, please leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Jar of Peanut Butter Cold Foam to be used on top of coffee
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Peanut Butter Cold Foam

Peanut Butter Cold Foam is a nutty and sweet cream topping that goes onto cold coffee drinks. Ready in minutes, it is the perfect cold coffee topping to make at home!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 2
Calories: 137kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Large glass
  • Milk Frother

Ingredients

  • 4 tbsp Heavy Cream
  • 2 1/2 tbsp 2% Milk
  • 1/2 tbsp Peanut Butter Powder
  • 2 tsp Sugar

Instructions

  • Add ingredients to a tall glass.
  • Froth ingredients together for 30 seconds until liquid has doubled in size.
  • Pour on top of cold coffee and enjoy!

Nutrition

Serving: 2g | Calories: 137kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 35mg | Sodium: 32mg | Potassium: 60mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 490IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Recipes

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

September 21, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 13 Comments

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup in a whiskey glass with cold brew coffee, whiskey bottle and brown sugar rim

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup is an iced alcoholic drink with a caffeinated kick! This coffee and bourbon cocktail is sweetened with a homemade Maple Simple Syrup and is easy to make at home!

Coffee drinks never get old! Looking for a new, twist on coffee? Try this Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew or this Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake!

Pouring Maple Coffee Cocktail out of a cocktail shaker into a whiskey glass

Do you ever get bored of grabbing a beer from the refrigerator or pouring yourself a glass of wine? Sometimes, it feels like making a cocktail is too much work after a long day. I totally get that! When you are tired and need a little pick me up, try this Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup! Make the simple syrup ahead of time (don’t worry, you can use it in other recipes!) and all you have to do is pour, shake and drink!

Coffee Drink Details

Level of Difficulty: Simple! For this recipe, you only have to make the Maple Simple Syrup. All this entails is mixing the ingredients on the stove. Brew coffee. Then, mix the ingredients together, shake, pour and enjoy!

Flavor: This Kentucky Coffee has a lightly sweet flavor combined with floral notes from the bourbon. The coffee gives the cocktail a nutty flavor. You do not taste strong alcohol in this drink.

Time: If all of the ingredients are prepared (coffee brewed and cooled and Maple Simple Syrup made), this recipe takes about 5 minutes to mix up. The Maple Simple Syrup takes about 10 minutes to make. I recommend brewing the coffee ahead of time so that it has time to cool.

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Coffee: Use a coffee that you enjoy drinking! I recommend using Coffee Rendezbrew’s Dewey Beach Roast. This roast has bourbon and pecan flavor notes and pairs perfectly with the bourbon and Maple Simple Syrup!
  • Bourbon: Just like with the coffee, use a bourbon that you enjoy drinking! I used Bib & Tucker Small Batch Bourbon because I enjoy the nutty hints. I don’t recommend using a flavored bourbon as the flavor may compete with the Maple Simple Syrup.
  • Water
  • Maple Syrup: Use authentic maple syrup, not pancake syrup.
  • Brown Sugar
  • Maple Nut Sugar: I chose to use this Maple Nut Sugar from Coffee Rendezbrew in the Maple Simple Syrup and to rim my whiskey glass. I like how the sweet nuttiness compliments the coffee cocktail. If you cannot find this sugar, replace with brown sugar.

How To Make

  1. Brew Coffee. This Kentucky Coffee is served chilled. I recommend brewing your coffee ahead of time and allowing to cool to room temperature or refrigerating before you make the cocktail.
  2. Make Maple Simple Syrup. This step can be done ahead of time. Add water, maple syrup, brown sugar and Maple Nut Sugar to a small pot and turn heat to medium. Allow water to warm and stir to combine the water with the maple syrup and the sugars. Once bubbles begin to form, remove pot from the heat and let cool. While the syrup cools, it will thicken. Store refrigerated in an airtight container.
  3. Combine Cocktail. Add ice to a cocktail shaker. Add coffee, bourbon and Maple Simple Syrup. Shake cocktail shaker for about 15 seconds until the exterior of the shaker becomes cold. Pour coffee cocktail over ice in a whiskey glass.
  4. Enjoy your Bourbon Coffee Cocktail! 

Grabbing a maple coffee cocktail with bourbon- the perfect afternoon pick me up!

What kind of coffee should I use in a coffee cocktail?

Use a coffee that you enjoy and that pairs with the alcohol in the coffee! In this Kentucky Coffee, I chose a coffee that has bourbon and pecan notes. This perfectly paired with the nutty Maple Simple Syrup. Try the coffee here!

What else can I do with Maple Simple Syrup?

Use Maple Simple Syrup to replace the sugar in your coffee or tea, on top of ice cream, pancakes or waffles. Another option is to mix the Maple Simple Syrup with butter when sautéing vegetables. The Maple Simple Syrup can be kept in refrigerated for up to 3 weeks (if it last’s that long).

What is a Kentucky Coffee?

A Kentucky Coffee is a coffee cocktail that mixes bourbon and coffee. This cocktail is similar to an Irish Coffee that mixes whiskey and coffee.

Expert Tips

  • If you are looking for more caffeine, use cold brew coffee instead of cooled drip coffee!
  • Prepare the Maple Simple Syrup ahead of time so that you can quickly whip up this Kentucky Coffee!

Looking for another cocktail recipe? Try one of these! 

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe) 

Chai Cider Whiskey

Party Cosmopolitans (Large Batch Recipe)

If you make this recipe, please leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram. Cheers!

Maple Coffee Cocktail with Bourbon and a Maple Nut Sugar rim
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup is an iced alcoholic drink with a caffeinated kick! This coffee and bourbon cocktail is sweetened with a homemade Maple Simple Syrup and is easy to make at home!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: cocktail
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 105kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Cocktail Shaker

Ingredients

  • 4 oz Coffee Cold or Room Temperature
  • 1-2 oz Bourbon
  • 1/2 - 1 oz Maple Simple Syrup
  • Maple Nut Sugar to rim on glass Optional

Maple Nut Simple Syrup Recipe

  • 1 cup Water
  • 1/2 cup Maple Syrup
  • 1/4 cup Brown Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Maple Nut Sugar

Instructions

Maple Bourbon Coffee Cocktail

  • Combine coffee, bourbon and Maple Simple Syrup in a cocktail shaker with ice.
  • Shake to blend until the outside of the cocktail shaker is cold (about 15 seconds).
  • Rim a whiskey glass with maple nut sugar.
  • Serve cocktail over ice.

Maple Nut Simple Syrup

  • Add water, maple syrup, brown sugar and maple nut sugar to a pot over medium heat.
  • Allow water to warm. Stir to combine brown sugar, maple nut sugar and maple syrup.
  • Once bubbles begin to form on the edge of the pot, remove from heat.
  • Let syrup cool. Store in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 105kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 0.1g | Fat: 0.02g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 11mg | Potassium: 65mg | Sugar: 10g | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Coffee, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas!)

September 19, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

Peach Baked Oatmeal (without bananas) on plates with extra peaches and milk

Peach Baked Oatmeal is an easy and healthy breakfast! These baked oats use pantry staples and no bananas. This classic breakfast can be made ahead of time for quick, on the go breakfasts!

 

Need another on the go breakfast? Try this Ricotta Quiche with Spinach. It is a perfect dish to meal prep and heat up throughout the week. Or, try this Toasted Coconut Granola. Sprinkle some granola on top of yogurt for a healthy breakfast!

 

Peach Baked Oatmeal on plates with extra peach slices

One of my favorite parts of summer (aside from the sunny skies and warm weather) is the bounty of fresh produce. Living in Delaware, our farms provide some of the freshest fruits and vegetables. I love the end of the summer when stone fruits are in season and you can go peach picking or pick up peaches at your local farmers market.

 

With breakfast being the most important meal of the day, I like to feed my children (and myself) something healthy. I also struggle to get out of the door every day. This Peach Baked Oatmeal is the answer to my breakfast woes. It is perfect to make ahead of time and reheat on busy weekday mornings. Plus, this baked oatmeal is made without bananas so it will not have any banana taste. Full of healthy, sweet peaches and whole grain oats, your kids will love it and you will feel good feeding them a wholesome breakfast.

 

Peach Oatmeal Details

 

Flavor: This Peach Baked Oatmeal has a sweet cinnamon and peach flavor. It tastes almost like you are eating a warm muffin with an oat consistency (no banana flavor!).

Level of Difficulty: Easy! This recipe only requires two bowls. After chopping, mixing and baking, you will have a delicious warm breakfast to serve your family!

Time: This recipe takes about 10 minutes to mix together and 30 minutes in the oven for a total of 40 minutes in the kitchen!

 

Ingredients and Substitutions

 

  • Coconut Oil: Coconut oil is the healthy option when making Peach Baked Oatmeal. If you do not have coconut oil, substitute vegetable oil or melted butter.
  • Cinnamon Applesauce: Use regular applesauce here. You could also replace the applesauce completely with vegetable oil or coconut oil.
  • Honey Greek Yogurt: The Honey Greek Yogurt gives this recipe a sweet taste. This is the Honey Greek Yogurt that my family loves. If you cannot find Honey Greek Yogurt, add a tablespoon of honey to plain Greek Yogurt.
  • Almond Milk: Substitute the milk that you have on hand.
  • Eggs: You could substitute liquid egg whites although this has not been tested.
  • Sugar: I don’t recommend removing the sugar in this recipe as the recipe calls for so little. If looking for a natural sweetener, you could use a banana (not tested).
  • Oats: Use Old Fashioned Oats for this recipe not quick cooking or steel cut oats.
  • Cinnamon 
  • Baking Powder
  • Peaches: Substitute your favorite fruit! Nectarines would be a delicious option. Berries such as raspberries, strawberries and blueberries are good in baked oatmeal.

 

Peach Baked Oatmeal Ingredients: peaches, greek yogurt, coconut oil, cinnamon, almond milk, eggs, sugar, baking powder and oats

 

Step by Step Instructions

 

  1. Combine Wet Ingredients. In a large mixing bowl, combine melted coconut oil, applesauce, Honey Greek Yogurt, Almond Milk, eggs and sugar. Stir to combine.
  2. Mix Dry Ingredients. In a small bowl, stir together the old fashioned oats, cinnamon and baking powder.
  3. Mix wet and dry ingredients. Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients in the large mixing bowl. Stir to combine.
  4. Stir in peaches.
  5. Pour mixture into an 8×8 pan.
  6. Make cinnamon sugar. In a small bowl, mix together cinnamon and sugar. Sprinkle on top of oatmeal bake.
  7. Bake. Bake Peach Oatmeal for 30 minutes at 350 degrees. Oatmeal is done when the middle is set and the sides begin to brown and pull away from the pan.

 

Storing and Reheating Instructions

Store Peach Baked Oatmeal in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days. Reheat individual pieces in the microwave for 30-45 seconds until heated throughout.

Freeze Peach Baked Oatmeal for an easy breakfast! Slice into pieces and wrap in plastic wrap. Remove piece the night before you plan to eat and allow the oatmeal to thaw in the refrigerator. Reheat in the microwave.

 

Why does this Baked Oatmeal have no banana?

Most baked oatmeal uses banana to naturally sweeten the dish and can be a good substitute for butter. This dish uses healthy coconut oil and applesauce in place of butter so a banana is not needed.

 

How to Serve Baked Oatmeal

  • Slice and serve with fresh sliced fruit
  • Serve warm on top of Greek Yogurt with fruit on top (my favorite)
  • For extra protein, serve hard boiled eggs on the side
  • Serve with a scoop of ice cream for a sweet breakfast or dessert!

 

Peach Baked Oatmeal plated and ready to serve

Is Baked Oatmeal Healthy?

Yes, baked oatmeal is healthy! This Peach Baked Oatmeal recipe is loaded with whole grains from the oats, healthy fats (coconut oil) and peaches. This recipe has minimal added sugar. This is a very healthy alternative to sugar filled cereals and fattening breakfast sandwiches. 

 

FAQ

Can you freeze baked oatmeal? Yes, you can freeze baked oatmeal! Simply slice baked oatmeal into individual pieces and wrap them in plastic wrap. When ready to enjoy, let the baked oatmeal thaw in the refrigerator overnight and reheat in the microwave the next morning.

Is baked oatmeal good the next day? Yes, baked oatmeal is good the next day. The flavors come together and the oatmeal congeals after cooking. It is perfect to reheat and enjoy!

What fruit is best in oatmeal? Berries and stone fruit are delicious in baked oatmeal. I like to use nectarines, strawberries, blueberries and blackberries to naturally sweeten my baked oatmeal.

 

Need a drink to go with your breakfast?!

 

Try one of these:

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew

Iced Matcha Chai Latte

5 Ingredient Banana Watermelon Smoothie

Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup

 

If you make this recipe, please leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram! Enjoy!

Peach Baked Oatmeal sliced in pan
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas)

Peach Baked Oatmeal is an easy and healthy breakfast! These baked oats use pantry staples and no bananas. This classic breakfast can be made ahead of time for quick, on the go breakfasts!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
30 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 261kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 2 Mixing Bowls
  • 8x8 Pan

Ingredients

  • 1/4 cup Coconut Oil Melted
  • 3/4 cup Cinnamon Applesauce
  • 2/3 cup Honey Greek Yogurt
  • 1/2 cup Almond Milk
  • 2 Eggs
  • 1/4 cup Sugar
  • 2 tsp Baking Powder
  • 1 tsp Cinnamon
  • 1 1/2 cups Peaches Chopped
  • 1 1/2 cups Old Fashioned Oats

Cinnamon Sugar

  • 1 tbsp Sugar
  • 1/2 tsp Cinnamon

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350. Spray an 8x8 baking dish with cooking spray.
  • To a large bowl, add melted coconut oil, applesauce, Greek yogurt, almond milk, eggs, vanilla and sugar. Stir to combine.
  • In a small bowl, add oats, baking powder and cinnamon. Mix together.
  • Stir in chopped peaches.
  • Add dry ingredients to wet ingredients. Mix to combine.
  • Pour mixture into baking dish. Sprinkle cinnamon sugar on top.
  • Bake for 30 minutes.

Cinnamon Sugar

  • Add sugar and cinnamon to a small bowl. Stir to combine.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 261kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 204mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 216IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 2mg

Filed Under: Breakfast, Recipes, Spring Recipes, Summer Recipes

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe)

September 1, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 2 Comments

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade, a refreshing whiskey and vodka cocktail similar to Fisher's Island Lemonade

This Spiked Cranberry Lemonade Recipe is a copycat recipe of the ‘Pink Flamingo’ canned cocktail made by Fishers Island. This drink is simple and sweet! With just 4 ingredients, this refreshing cocktail will become your new favorite!

Thirsty for more? Try this Simple Peach Sangria with Rose Wine! This smooth and sweet sangria is perfect for large crowds. Or, try this Refreshing Cucumber Cocktail with Mint and Lime. It is easy and light, perfect for a hot summer night!

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade in a glass with extra lemons, cocktail shaker and lemonade

Have you tried a Fisher’s Island Lemonade? I am obsessed with their Pink Lemonade version called ‘Pink Flamingo.’ It comes in a can, is slightly sweet with a little tang and goes down easy. Better yet, it is 7% alcohol. While this is a high percentage, it is lower than the traditional Fisher’s Island Lemonade at 9%!

While I have been enjoying these canned cocktails all summer, I knew that this recipe is one that I could easily recreate at home. Making this Spiked Cranberry Lemonade is significantly less expensive than buying the original canned version and I can control the sweetness level and sugar. It is a win-win! While this drink is very similar to the ‘Pink Flamingo’ by Fisher’s Island, it is not the exact recipe and it is my take on the ‘Pink Flamingo.’

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade Details

Flavor: This Spiked Cranberry Lemonade is the perfect mix of sweet and tangy. The alcohol taste is very subtle, however, the honey whiskey shines through! This sweet cocktail tastes light and refreshing.

Level of Difficulty: Simple! All that is required is adding the ingredients to the shaker, shaking the cocktail up and pouring over ice.

Time: It will only take you about 5 minutes to shake up this Spiked Cranberry Lemonade! Those 5 minutes include gathering your ingredients.

Cocktail Ingredients & Substitutions

The best part about this Spiked Cranberry Lemonade is that it uses only 4 simple ingredients!

  • Lemonade: In my opinion, the most difficult part about testing this recipe was finding the right lemonade! Make sure to use a yellow lemonade (not a pink lemonade) in this recipe and one that is not too sweet. I have been using this Nature’s Nectar Not from Concentrate Homestyle Lemonade from Aldi to make this Cranberry Lemonade Cocktail.
  • Cranberry Juice: This recipe does not use a lot of cranberry juice so make sure that you are using real cranberry juice and not one that is mixed with other flavors.
  • Vodka: I used regular Tito’s Vodka in this recipe. For extra flavor, you could use a Lemon or Cranberry flavored vodka. Deep Eddy Lemon Vodka is a great option!
  • Whiskey: Finding the right whiskey was also difficult in this recipe. The whiskey that complimented the lemonade best was Seagram’s Dark Honey Whiskey. The honey adds the perfect amount of sweetness to the tart lemonade.

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade Ingredients: Whiskey, Cranberry Juice, Lemonade and Vodka

How To Make

  1. Add ice to a cocktail shaker.
  2. Add lemonade, cranberry juice, vodka and whiskey.
  3. Mix until the outside of the cocktail shaker becomes cold, around 15 seconds.
  4. Pour cocktail into cocktail glass over top of ice.
  5. Garnish with fresh mint (optional).
  6. Enjoy!

Recipe Variations

Make it bubbly: Top the cocktail with club soda or Sprite for a cocktail spritzer.

Make it a mocktail: To make this recipe into a mocktail, simply omit the vodka and whiskey. Increase the lemonade proportion to 9.5 oz and the whiskey proportion to 2.5 oz. This will make a pretty pink lemonade!

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade with lemons, mint and cranberry juice

What is the best whiskey to use?

The best whiskey to use in this Spiked Cranberry Lemonade is one with subtle flavors. Because you are mixing the whiskey and not drinking it neat, you want to use a whiskey that is also affordable. I used Seagram’s Dark Honey Whiskey in this recipe because I like how the honey complimented the tanginess of the lemonade. Four Roses and Maker’s Mark are also good in this cocktail. Most importantly, you should use  a whiskey that you enjoy drinking.

What is the best vodka to use?

The best vodka to use is one that is neutral in flavor and that you enjoy. The vodka taste is lost in the lemonade and cranberry juice. I like using Tito’s Vodka in this cocktail because it is smooth in taste and is affordable. If you want to add extra flavor or sweetness, use a flavored vodka like Deep Eddy Lemon.

FAQ

What is Fisher’s Island Lemonade? Fisher’s Island Lemonade is a canned cocktail made with lemonade, vodka, whiskey and honey. They have a few different flavors. This recipe is created after their ‘Pink Flamingo’ canned cocktail.

Can I make this drink with less calories? If looking for a lighter cocktail, try using Diet Lemonade and Diet Cranberry Juice. This will reduce the amount of sugar and calories in the drink.

Can I make this drink with less alcohol? Absolutely! Simply, use less vodka and whiskey. You could use only an ounce of vodka and 1/4 oz of whiskey and increase the lemonade proportion to 8.5 oz and the cranberry juice to 2.25 oz.

What to serve with this cocktail?

Try these Happy Hour recipe favorites:

Crispy Old Bay Wings

Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Prosciutto

Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash

If you try this recipe, please comment below and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade in a glass with extra lemons, cocktail shaker and lemonade
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher's Island Copycat)

This Spiked Cranberry Lemonade Recipe is a copycat recipe of the 'Pink Flamingo' canned drink made by Fishers Island. This cocktail is simple and sweet! With just 4 ingredients, this refreshing cocktail will become your new favorite!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: cocktail
Servings: 1
Calories: 614kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Cocktail Shaker
  • Cocktail Glass

Ingredients

  • 7 oz Lemonade
  • 2.5 oz Vodka
  • 1/2 oz Whiskey
  • 2 oz Cranberry Juice
  • Mint & Lemon Slices To Garnish
  • Ice

Instructions

  • Add ice to a cocktail shaker.
  • Add lemonade, cranberry juice, vodka and whiskey.
  • Shake cocktail to combine for about 15 seconds until exterior of shaker is cold.
  • Pour drink over top of ice.
  • Garnish with mint and lemon slices.
  • Enjoy!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 614kcal | Carbohydrates: 106g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 16mg | Potassium: 187mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 95g | Vitamin A: 26IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 0.3mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Recipes, Summer Recipes

Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash

August 26, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 1 Comment

Vegetable Bruschetta with cherry tomatoes, zucchini and yellow squash drizzled with a balsamic glaze

Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash is a simple appetizer of roasted vegetables on a crunchy crostini. This appetizer looks fancy but is simple and feeds a crowd!

The best part of summer is the plethora of fresh produce in gardens, roadside stands and grocery stores. I love cooking with garden fresh vegetables and fruits to make healthy and fast dishes. If your house is bursting with produce, try this Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto or this Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables. These recipes are delicious and healthy options that are heavy on the produce!

Sheet pan of vegetable bruschetta topped with parmesan cheese and balsamic glaze

Bruschetta Details

Level of Difficulty: Easy! This recipe consists of chopping, baking and topping the bruschetta.

Flavor: The bruschetta has a sweet flavor really shines after vegetables are roasted. The shaved parmesan adds a salty hint and the balsamic glaze finishes the vegetable bruschetta with extra sweetness.

Time: This recipe has 10 minutes of hands on time (chopping and topping) and 30 minutes of baking time. If making this recipe ahead of time, have the vegetables chopped and the bread prepared so that you can bake the vegetables, top the bread and quickly and easily serve.

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • French Bread: You could substitute ciabatta bread or an Italian loaf.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Substitute regular olive oil.
  • Garlic Clove: Garlic Powder could be sprinkled on the bread in place of rubbing a garlic clove.
  • Zucchini: Eggplant has a similar consistency to zucchini and would be delicious in this vegetable bruschetta!
  • Yellow Squash: Try using mushrooms in place of the yellow squash. Mushrooms mix well with the tomatoes and zucchini.
  • Cherry Tomatoes: Use sliced fresh tomatoes or even jarred sun-dried tomatoes!
  • Parmesan Cheese: I recommend using a cheese block not pre-shredded cheese here. The block has a stronger flavor and melts easier with the warm vegetables. If you do not have parmesan cheese on hand, substitute asiago cheese or a fresh, sharp cheddar.
  • Balsamic Glaze: You can make your own balsamic glaze using just balsamic vinegar. Try this simple recipe! If you do not want this extra step, a Balsamic Vinaigrette Salad Dressing can work in a pinch!

Vegetable Bruschetta Ingredients: parmesan cheese, french bread, balsamic glaze, extra virgin olive oil, cherry tomatoes, yellow squash, zucchini and garlic

Let’s Get Cookin’!

  1. Make the bruschetta bread. Slice French Bread on a diagonal angle about 1/2 inch thick. Make sure that all bread slices are similar in size. Spray both sides of the bread with Extra Virgin Olive Oil and rub with a garlic clove. Turn the oven on to broil. Broil each side for about 90 seconds until bread is toasty.
  2. Make the roasted vegetables. Add sliced zucchini, yellow squash and halved cherry tomatoes to a large bowl. Drizzle Extra Virgin Olive Oil on top and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Mix to combine. Pour vegetables onto a baking sheet and bake until vegetables are soft and tomatoes begin to burst about 20-25 minutes.
  3. Make vegetable bruschetta! Top bread slices with about 2 tablespoons of the vegetable mixture. Sprinkle with shredded parmesan cheese and drizzle balsamic glaze on top.
  4. Enjoy! This bruschetta can be enjoyed hot or cold. It is best eaten the day that it is made. The bread becomes hard quickly. If you have extra vegetables, store in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Serve with fresh bread. You can reheat the vegetables or serve them cold.

Expert Tips

  • Make sure to slice your vegetables and bread similar in size. By slicing the vegetables and bread in a similar size, you can be sure that the bread will toast and the vegetables will roast evenly and take the same amount of time.
  • Watch the broiler!! Do not try to multitask while broiling the bruschetta. Keep a close eye and remove the bread from the oven as soon as it looks golden.
  • Prepare this dish ahead of time! This dish is best served when the vegetables come out of the oven. To prepare ahead of time, have the bread sliced and store in an airtight bag. Chop your vegetables and mix with EVOO, salt and pepper ahead of time. These steps will allow you to prepare this appetizer according to the instructions but without the prep time!
  • Use your leftovers! If you have leftover vegetables, store refrigerated in an airtight container. Use to make fresh bruschetta or to top on grilled chicken. The perfect, healthy summer meal!

FAQ

Is Vegetable Bruschetta healthy? Yes, Vegetable Bruschetta is healthy. While this is a small appetizer, the vegetables pack a big punch. These vegetables are full of healthy vitamins such as vitamin A and C as well as antioxidants.

What can I use for bread instead of bruschetta? If you are looking for a bread alternative to bruschetta, you could serve this with pita or crackers. If you are looking to cut carbohydrates, serve on top of cucumbers or inside sliced bell peppers.

What can I use leftover bruschetta for? You can use the leftover vegetable bruschetta topping on top of grilled chicken or as a topping for a garden salad.

If you make this easy Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Yellow Squash, please leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Sheet pan of vegetable bruschetta topped with parmesan cheese and balsamic glaze
Print Recipe
5 from 1 vote

Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash

Vegetable Bruschetta with Cherry Tomatoes and Squash is a simple appetizer of roasted vegetables on a crunchy crostini. This appetizer looks fancy but is simple and feeds a crowd!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 185kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Bread Knife
  • Veggie Knife
  • Mixing Bowl
  • Baking Sheet

Ingredients

  • 1 French Bread Loaf
  • 1 tbsp Extra Virgin Olive Oil plus more for bread
  • 2 Garlic Cloves
  • 1 cup Zucchini Chopped
  • 1 cup Yellow Squash Chopped
  • 1 cup Cherry Tomatoes Halved
  • Salt & Pepper
  • 1/2 cup Parmesan Cheese Block Shredded
  • Balsamic Glaze

Instructions

  • Turn oven on to broil.
  • Slice French Bread into small pieces on a diagonal angle. Spray with Extra Virgin Olive Oil and rub with a garlic clove on both sides of bread.
  • Broil bread for about 90 seconds to 2 minutes on each side. Remove from oven.
  • Turn oven on to 400 degrees.
  • Add chopped zucchini, yellow squash and cherry tomatoes to a medium size bowl. Drizzle with Extra Virgin Olive, salt and pepper. Stir to combine.
  • Place chopped vegetables into a roasting pan. Roast for 25-30 minutes until vegetables are soft.
  • Top bread with vegetables while vegetables are still warm.
  • Top with parmesan cheese and drizzle with balsamic glaze.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 405mg | Potassium: 185mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 199IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 108mg | Iron: 2mg

Filed Under: Appetizer, Recipes, Spring Recipes, Summer Recipes

Matcha Chai Tea Latte with Chai Simple Syrup

August 17, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 3 Comments

Glass of Iced Matcha Chai with a straw

This Matcha Chai Tea Latte with Chai Simple Syrup is a simple recipe that you can make at home yet feels like you ordered at your local coffee shop! 

A glass filled with a green iced matcha chai latte, featuring a mix of light and dark swirls, topped with a gold straw. It rests on a round marble coaster. Another similar drink is blurred in the background beside white flowers.

A chai tea latte is always my go to drink order when I want a cozy drink. When matcha tea became the trendy drink a few years ago, I decided to combine my love for chai and the health benefits of matcha into a homemade version! 

Looking for a fun topping for your coffee shop copycat recipes? Try this simple 3 Ingredient Strawberry Cold Foam. Elevate any coffee drink or tea latte with a fun and colorful cold foam! Or, if you love chai tea as much as I do, try this Pumpkin Spice Chai Tea Latte! This warm latte combines all of the chai flavors with a pumpkin twist! 

Why You’ll Love This Latte

  • Sweet! This latte has a sweet quick thanks to the Chai Simple Syrup. If you have not enjoyed matcha before because of the flavor, this matcha chai latte recipe will change your mind! 
  • Homemade Chai Simple Syrup! This chai simple syrup will change your life! Use it in coffee, tea or in cocktails! It is so simple to make. 
  • Cost effective. If you get annoyed paying $7 for your favorite latte, make this one at home to save on time and calories! 

Ingredients

A flat lay of ingredients for a matcha chai latte: a plate with vibrant green matcha powder, a measuring cup of fresh milk, and a steaming tea bag beside a cup of brewed chai tea, all complemented by a small bowl of aromatic chai simple syrup.
  • The Chai Simple Syrup is made up of water, brown sugar, a cinnamon stick, and chai tea bags. 
  • Milk and a chai tea bag are combined to create the latte base. 
  • Matcha powder is frothed with water and then poured over the milk to add a green hue and earthy flavor. 
  • The Chai Simple Syrup is combined with the latte for a sweet and cozy flavor. 

Exact measurements can be found in the below recipe card. 

Substitutions

  • To make this latte dairy free, use a plant-based milk such as oat milk, almond milk, coconut milk or soy milk. 
  • Replace the chai tea bags with store-bought chai concentrate or loose chai tea. 
  • The homemade chai simple syrup can be substituted with extra chai concentrate or by adding sugar to taste. 
  • The brown sugar in the simple syrup can be replaced with maple syrup and a little vanilla extract. 

Equipment

  • Small sauce pan to make the chai simple syrup and one to brew the tea. 
  • Glass or mug
  • Electric milk frother or traditional matcha whisk 

Step-by-Step Instructions

A pot of hot dark liquid with a cinnamon stick and two tea bags soaking in it, resembling a cozy drink. The background is white, and the pot has a handle visible at the bottom.

Step 1: Begin by making the Chai Simple Syrup. Add the brown sugar and water to a small pot over medium heat. Stir to dissolve the brown sugar. Bring to a boil. Add the cinnamon stick and chai tea bag and turn the heat down. Let steep for 10 minutes. 

A hand pours milk from a Pyrex measuring cup into a clear mug on a table, crafting a creamy matcha chai latte. A green napkin, a copper kettle, and a potted plant with pink flowers set the scene, while a teaspoon with yellow powder rests on the left.

Step 2: Heat milk either on the stove or in the microwave. Add the milk to a mug with the chai tea bag and let steep for 5-10 minutes.

A clear glass mug brimming with matcha chai latte is being whisked by a handheld frother. It's nestled on a cork coaster atop a green cloth. In the background, a large gold flowerpot and copper kettle gracefully complete the serene scene.

Step 3: Add the water and matcha powder to a tall glass. Use a milk frother or matcha whisk to dissolve the matcha powder into the water. 

A glass mug on a decorative stand is being filled with matcha chai latte, its green hue mixing with the lighter drink inside. It rests on a printed coaster, beside a green cloth and large plant pot, while a copper kettle sits gracefully in the background.

Step 4: Make the latte by adding 1-2 tablespoons of simple syrup to a mug or glass. Pour the chai milk over top and then top with the matcha concentrate. Stir to combine all ingredients and enjoy! 

Top tip

  • Make the chai simple syrup ahead of time.
  • Be sure to fully mix the matcha powder with the water. There should not be any fine powder left in the liquid.

Storage

I do not recommend storing leftover latte. However, store the remaining chai syrup refrigerated in an airtight container like a mason jar. This simple syrup is great with coffee and cocktails alike! 

Health Benefits of Matcha & Chai

  • Matcha: Made from the entire green tea leaf, matcha has higher levels of caffeine and antioxidants than traditional green tea. WebMD states that matcha can help to lower blood pressure, reduce joint inflammation and even aid in weight loss.
  • Chai: This concoction of spices is also rich in antioxidants. The flavonoids from the black tea can boost heart health. The ginger can aid in food digestion and boost your immune system.

FAQ

Is there caffeine in a Matcha Chai Latte?

Yes, there is caffeine in a matcha chai latte. If the latte is made according to the recipe measurements, this latte should have around 100 mg of caffeine which is about the same caffeine level as an 8 oz cup of coffee.

What kind of matcha do you recommend?

I recommend using a ceremonial-grade matcha powder. My favorite brand is DAVIDsTea. 

Is a Matcha Chai Latte coffee?

No, a Matcha Chai Latte is a combination of milk and teas.

What is the best milk for a latte?

The best milk for a latte is one that you enjoy! If you prefer sweeter drinks, use a flavored almond milk or coconut milk that is naturally sweeter. If you need to avoid lactose, use a plant-based milk. The more fat that is in the milk, the better the milk will froth.

What is the difference between a matcha chai latte and a matcha chai tea?

The difference between a matcha chai latte and a matcha chai tea is that a latte uses milk as the base. Tea uses water as a base. The milk gives the drink more substance and is sweeter than if made with water.

Are matcha and chai good together?

Yes, the flavors of matcha and chai blend well together, making a slightly earthy, nutty and sweet drink.

Can you make this Matcha Chai Latte into an Iced Latte?

Yes, you can make this an iced matcha chai latte perfect for hot days! Simply add ice to a tall glass and mix up the drink! 

What other recipes use Chai Simple Syrup? I have a whole cup!

Use the Chai Simple Syrup in coffee or try it in this Spiced Chai Cider Bourbon. With only 4 ingredients, this cocktail is easy to make and full of flavor! 

Related

Try one of these caffeinated treats!

  • Coffee milkshakes topped with whipped cream and chocolate syrup.
    Frozen Coffee Milkshake with Malted Milk Powder
  • Mocha Lavender Latte Recipe with Homemade Syrup
  • Coffee Ice Cream Float showing three distinct layers: the blueberry milk layer, the cold brew layer and the ice cream layer.
    Blueberry Chai Coffee Ice Cream Float (Cold Brew Recipe)
  • An Irish Cream Breve with four leaf clovers and coffee beans.
    Classic Irish Cream Breve (Easy Coffee Recipe)

Pairing

Enjoy your latte with one of these tasty breakfasts:

  • A slice of banana bread next to a pie plate.
    Easy Banana Bread Recipe (without a loaf pan)
  • Sauteed Mushroom and Spinach Egg Bites on a blue tray
    Mini Sauteed Mushroom and Spinach Egg Bites Recipe
  • Crispy, thick-cut Brown Sugar Candied Jalapeno Bacon on a wire rack fresh from the oven
    Candied Brown Sugar Jalapeno Bacon (Oven Baked)
  • 5 Ingredient Watermelon Banana Smoothie with watermelon slices and strawberries- the perfect summer breakfast!
    5 Ingredient Banana Watermelon Smoothie
Iced Matcha Chai Latte before stirring. Contrast between matcha tea and latte.
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Matcha Chai Tea Latte with Chai Simple Syrup

This Matcha Chai Tea Latte with Chai Simple Syrup is a simple recipe that you can make at home yet feels like you ordered at your local coffee shop! 
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: coffee
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 125kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • Milk frother or matcha whisk
  • Large glass
  • Tea diffuser if using loose tea
  • Small pot

Ingredients

  • 3/4 cup Unsweetened Coconut Milk
  • 1 tbsp Loose Chai Tea
  • 1-2 tbsp Chai Simple Syrup
  • 1/4 cup Water
  • 1 tsp Matcha Powder

Chai Simple Syrup

  • 1 tbsp Loose Chai Tea
  • 1 cup Water
  • 1 cup Brown Sugar
  • 1 Cinnamon Stick

Instructions

Chai Simple Syrup

  • Add water and brown sugar to a medium pot. Turn heat to medium high.
  • When water begins to simmer, remove from the heat. Stir to dissolve the brown sugar.
  • Add the cinnamon stick and the chai tea. Allow to steep for 10-15 minutes.
  • Remove tea and cinnamon stick. Store in the refrigerator in an airtight container.

Iced Matcha Chai Latte

  • Make the chai tea. Add coconut milk to a small pot. Turn heat to medium.
  • When milk begins to bubble on the side, remove from heat and add chai tea.
  • Allow to steep for at least 10 minutes.
  • Make the matcha. Add water and matcha powder to a tall glass.
  • Using a milk frother or a matcha whisk, mix together the matcha powder until there are no lumps.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 125kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 38g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 54mg | Potassium: 501mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 21g | Vitamin A: 210IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 5mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Recipes

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto

August 11, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 8 Comments

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with pesto, tomatoes, zucchini and corn

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto is the perfect simple appetizer or light summer dinner. Made with pre-made naan bread, this crispy pizza comes together in less than 10 minutes and uses the best summer produce! 

 

In the mood for more summer dishes? Try this Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables or this Easy Watermelon Salsa with Kiwi and Mint or these Easy Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Prosciutto! These dishes use the best fruit and vegetables of the summer!

 

Aside from the warm weather and sunny skies, the best part of summer to me is the fresh produce. I love eating what is fresh and in season. It is even better when you can grow it yourself! This naan bread pizza combines the best of summer produce, tomatoes, zucchini and corn, with fresh pesto and ricotta cheese. It is the perfect quick and easy appetizer or a light dinner to pair with a salad.

 

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with tomatoes, corn and zucchini on the side

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto Details

Level of Difficulty: Easy! This naan bread pizza comes together quickly using pre-made naan bread. Chop and sauté your veggies. Then, dress and bake your pizza. That is it! This easy appetizer or light dinner can be made in about 20 minutes from chop to finish.

Time: From start to finish, this pizza can be made in 20 minutes. That includes prep time (chopping veggies), stove time for the veggies, pre-baking the naan bread and then baking the naan bread pizza.

Flavor: Fresh! Basil is a prominent flavor in this pizza. The basil shines in the pesto and then again on top of the pizza. The ricotta cheese and fresh corn give the naan bread pizza a slightly sweet taste. The zucchini and the tomatoes give the pizza some tang and substance.

 

Ingredients and Substitutions

Naan Bread: Substitute a pre-made flatbread or pizza dough for naan bread. Note, the cook time will vary when using a different base. If you are looking for a homemade naan bread, try this paleo flatbread! 

Extra Virgin Olive Oil

Pesto: I recommend using a homemade pesto. Try this delicious homemade pesto from my friend Giangi! If using a store-bought pesto, use a high quality pesto and be sure to check that the pesto uses basil.

Whole Milk Ricotta Cheese: Substitute a part skim ricotta cheese or use fresh mozzarella cheese slices.

Mixed Vegetables: I use a mix of sliced zucchini, fresh corn and cherry tomatoes. Use the vegetables that are fresh in your area. Yellow squash, cauliflower and mushrooms would be delicious on this flatbread.

Fresh Basil: Substitute dried basil or use fresh oregano or rosemary.

Fresh Rosemary: Substitute dried rosemary or use fresh chopped oregano.

 

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza Ingredients: Naan Bread, Tomatoes, Pesto, Ricotta Cheese, Corn, Zucchini, Basil and Rosemary

 

How to make Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto

  1. Pre-bake the naan bread. Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Place naan bread directly on stove grates and cook for 3 minutes.
  2. Sauté the vegetables. Heat a sauté pan over medium high heat. Add Extra Virgin Olive Oil to pan and heat. Add zucchini, corn and tomatoes. Season with salt and pepper. Sauté for 4-5 minutes until tomatoes are blistered and corn is slightly charred.
  3. Assemble the pizza. Start by spraying the pizza crust with Extra Virgin Olive Oil. Sprinkle chopped rosemary on crust. Spread pesto onto pizza. Spoon dollops of ricotta cheese on top of pesto. Add vegetables to pizza.
  4. Bake pizza. Bake for 5-8 minutes. Pizza is done when edges begin to brown and ricotta cheese begins to spread.
  5. Add toppings. Sprinkle with chopped basil and add any additional toppings. Serve hot or cold.

Expert Tips

  • Use homemade pesto! The pesto makes this pizza. Using pesto made with fresh herbs will take this naan bread pizza to the next level. Here is another homemade pesto recipe made with pistachios!
  • Pre-bake your naan bread! Pre-baking your naan bread will keep it from becoming soggy.
  • Slice into handheld pieces to make a quick and easy appetizer!
  • Cook veggies ahead of time. This pizza with naan bread cooks quickly in the oven. So quickly that it will not cook your veggies. Be sure to cook your veggies until they are tender before putting them on top of the pizza. The veggies will continue to cook in the oven.
  • Dress up your crust! Add some EVOO and fresh herbs to your pizza crust. The EVOO will add a crispness to the crust and the fresh herbs will add extra flavor the base.

 

FAQ

  • Is naan bread vegan? Traditionally, naan bread is not vegan as it can include butter, ghee or even eggs. This naan bread is not vegan and the toppings are not vegan friendly.
  • How do you keep the naan bread from getting soggy? To prevent the naan bread from becoming soggy, prebake your naan bread. By prebaking the naan bread, the bread becomes crispy before adding the wet ingredients. This prevents the naan bread from becoming watered down and soggy.
  • What toppings can I use on my pizza with naan bread? You can use any toppings when using naan bread as a pizza base. Use pizza sauce with cheese to make a traditional pizza. Or use a white sauce with your favorite veggies and cheese to customize your pizza.
  • What should I serve my naan bread pizza with? Serve your naan bread pizza with a side salad for a light and healthy dinner. Or serve the naan pizza sliced as an easy entertaining appetizer.

 

Taking a slice of Veggie Naan Bread Pizza

 

Looking for another easy flatbread? Try this Greek Veggie Flatbread!

 

If you make this Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto, please leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes!

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with tomatoes, corn and zucchini on the side
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto

Veggie Naan Bread Pizza with Pesto is the perfect simple appetizer or light summer dinner. Made with pre-made naan bread, this crispy pizza comes together in less than 10 minutes and uses the best summer produce! 
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Main Course
Cuisine: American
Servings: 2
Calories: 786kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Cookie Sheet
  • 1 Saute Pan
  • 1 Pizza Slicer

Ingredients

  • 2 Premade Naan Breads
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • 1/2 cup Pesto
  • 1/4 cup Whole Milk Ricotta Cheese
  • 2 cups Mixed Vegetables Zuchinni, Tomatoes and Corn Used
  • 1/4 cup Basil Sliced
  • 1 Rosemary Sprig
  • Salt & Pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees. Bake naan bread directly on stove grates for 3 minutes. Remove from oven and place on a baking sheet.
  • Add Extra Virgin Olive Oil to a saute pan over medium high heat. Add tomatoes, corn and zucchini. Season with salt and pepper. Cook for 4 minutes until tender.
  • Spray crust of naan bread with Extra Virgin Olive Oil. Sprinkle crust with chopped rosemary.
  • Spread pesto on top of naan bread. Spoon ricotta over top of pesto. Add vegetables.
  • Cook for 5-8 minutes until ricotta begins to melt and crust browns.
  • Sprinkle with fresh basil. Serve hot or cold.

Nutrition

Serving: 2g | Calories: 786kcal | Carbohydrates: 90g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 31mg | Sodium: 1.538mg | Potassium: 427mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 10.788IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 294mg | Iron: 2mg

 

Filed Under: Appetizer, Main Course, Recipes, Summer Recipes

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew

August 2, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Maple Pecan Coffee made with Cold Brew, Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and cinnamon sticks

Maple Pecan Coffee made with Cold Brewed Coffee is a delicious iced coffee drink. With nutty caramel flavors, this is the perfect cold coffee drink to transition from summer to fall.

 

Looking for another caffeinated treat? Try this Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake (with Cold Brew Coffee) At Home Iced Matcha Chai Latte or this Kentucky Coffee with Maple Simple Syrup!

Maple Pecan Cold Coffee Ready to Drink

 

Cold Brew Maple Pecan Coffee Details

Level of Difficulty: This cold coffee drink is super simple to make! You will make the Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and the cold brewed coffee ahead of time. When you are ready to make your Maple Pecan Coffee, combine the coffee, simple syrup and add your choice of cream!

Time: 5 minutes or less! This is less time than it takes to go through the coffee drive through (and will cost you significantly less)! Both the Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and the cold brewed coffee are made ahead of time. The simple syrup takes about 20 minutes to make but only 2 minutes of actual hands on time. The cold brewed coffee takes less than 5 minutes to mix up and then steeps overnight.

Flavor: This coffee has a nutty, caramel and sweet flavor.

 

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Cold Brewed Coffee: the flavor of the coffee you use will shine through in this recipe so use one that you like. I like to use the Rehoboth Beach Roast from Coffee Rendezvous in this cold coffee drink. The Maple Pecan Simple Syrup highlights the praline, cinnamon and pecan flavors of this roast. If you do not have cold brewed coffee, you can use fresh brewed coffee that has cooled.
  • Maple Syrup: this is used in the Maple Pecan Simple Syrup. I do not suggest substituting this ingredient.
  • Pecans: the pecans are finely chopped and then infused into the simple syrup. If you do not have pecans on hand, you could substitute walnuts or almonds.
  • Light Brown Sugar: the molasses flavor in brown sugar pairs well with the maple syrup. You could also use dark brown sugar.
  • Water: this is the base for the simple syrup. Tap water works fine.
  • Cinnamon Stick: a teaspoon of ground cinnamon could be used in place of a cinnamon stick.
  • Creamer of choice: use whatever cream you enjoy in this cold coffee drink!

 

Maple Pecan Simple Syrup Ingredients: Water, Brown Sugar, Cinnamon Stick, Pecans

 

How to Make Maple Pecan Coffee (with Cold Brewed Coffee)

  1. Make Cold Brewed Coffee. Once you make cold brewed coffee at home, you will never purchase it at a coffee shop. It is so easy and inexpensive to make at home. Simply combine ground coffee with water in an airtight container (I like to use a mason jar) and let steep overnight. The coffee grounds to water ratio in my cold brewed coffee is 1/4 cup ground coffee to 1 cup of water. After the coffee steeps, remove the coffee grounds from the coffee concentrate. For more details on how to get the perfect cold brewed coffee, check out this post from my friend Meredith at Our Love Language is Food! 
  2. Make Maple Pecan Simple Syrup. To make the simple syrup, combine water, maple syrup and brown sugar in a pot over medium heat. Bring to a slow boil and allow the sugar to dissolve. Stir to combine all ingredients. Remove from heat and add the chopped pecans and cinnamon stick. Allow syrup to cool and the cinnamon and maple flavors to extract for 15-20 minutes. Remove cinnamon stick and strain the liquid to remove the chopped pecans. Store in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  3. Make Maple Pecan Coffee. Start by filling a glass with ice. Pour coffee over ice and add maple pecan syrup. Top with cream, stir and enjoy!

 

Expert Tips

  • Add whiskey to make an alcoholic cold coffee drink!
  • Use leftover cold brewed coffee to make ice cubes! This will prevent your coffee from becoming watered down.
  • To make this recipe dairy free, use a plant based milk such as almond milk or oat milk. This recipe is naturally gluten free.
  • This recipe makes a cup of Maple Pecan Simple Syrup. Use extra simple syrup to add extra flavor to tea, cider or in an alcoholic drink!
  • Make a large batch of cold brewed coffee so that you will have some every day of the week!
  • Cold Brew Coffee has more caffeine than traditional drip coffee. If sensitive to caffeine, add some water to your cold brew coffee or use decaf cold brew.

FAQ

  • Can you heat cold brewed coffee? Yes, you can heat cold brewed coffee! Cold brewed coffee has a naturally sweeter and a smoother taste than drip brewed coffee making it preferable to some tastes. This coffee can be reheated.
  • What is the difference between cold brewed coffee and iced coffee? The biggest difference with cold brewed coffee and iced coffee is how the coffee is made. Cold Brewed Coffee is never heated. It is made with cold or room temperature water combined with coffee grounds and then steeped for at least 12 hours. Iced Coffee is brewed drip coffee that is served over ice. Cold Brewed Coffee is less acidic and less bitter than regularly brewed coffee. Cold Brewed Coffee also is higher in caffeine.
  • What creamer goes with Maple Pecan Coffee? Use an unsweetened cream in this Maple Pecan Coffee. The Maple Pecan Simple Syrup is sweet from the maple syrup and brown sugar. A plain half and half or milk goes perfectly with the sweet simple syrup.
  • Can you make a decaffeinated Maple Pecan Coffee? Yes, you can make decaffeinated Maple Pecan Coffee! Simply, use a decaf coffee when you make the cold brewed coffee.

 

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brewed Coffee and Maple Pecan Simple Syrup

 

Need a breakfast idea to go with your coffee? Try this Easy and Light Ricotta Quiche or this Toasted Coconut Granola!

 

If you make this Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brewed Coffee, leave a comment or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brewed Coffee
Print Recipe

Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brewed Coffee

Maple Pecan Coffee made with Cold Brewed Coffee is a delicious iced coffee drink. With nutty caramel flavors, this is the perfect cold coffee drink to transition from summer to fall.
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: coffee
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 29kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Ingredients

  • 1/2 cup Cold Brewed Coffee
  • Ice
  • 1-2 tsp Maple Pecan Simple Syrup
  • Cream of choice Half & Half, Milk, Plant Based Milk, etc.

Maple Pecan Simple Syrup

  • 1 cup Water
  • 1/2 cup Maple Syrup
  • 1/2 cup Light Brown Sugar
  • 1/4 cup Pecans Chopped
  • 1 Cinnamon Stick

Instructions

  • Start with a glass filled half way with ice. Add desired amount of cold brewed coffee to glass. Add Maple Pecan Simple Syrup and cream. Stir to combine. Enjoy cold.

Maple Pecan Simple Syrup

  • Add water, brown sugar and maple syrup to a medium size pot. Turn heat to medium. Bring to slow boil. Stir to dissolve sugar and combine ingredients. Remove from heat.
  • Add chopped pecans and cinnamon stick. Allow flavors to steep for 15-20 minutes.
  • Remove cinnamon stick and strain pecan pieces.
  • Store refrigerated in an airtight container.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 29kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.01g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 7mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 10IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Fall Recipes, Recipes

Simple Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine

July 28, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 5 Comments

Peach Strawberry Sangria with Rose Wine in a pitcher with wine glasses full of delicious peach sangria

Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine is a fresh, light and simple cocktail. This drink captures the sweet flavors of summer and can be made for a crowd!

 

Need another summer cocktail? This Refreshing Cucumber Cocktail with Mint and Lime can be made as a cocktail or a mocktail! Or try this Spiked Cranberry Lemonade (Fisher’s Island Copycat Recipe). It has vodka and a little whiskey and is so simple to make at home!

 

Peach Sangria in glasses with peaches and strawberries

 

Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine Details

 

Level of Difficulty: Simple! All that you need to do is chop, pour and mix to make this easy and fresh cocktail!

Time: This peach sangria requires 5 minutes of chopping, 30 minutes of waiting and less than 5 minutes to mix all the ingredients together. It is perfect to prepare ahead of time of a large crowd.

Flavor: Sweet! The peaches and the strawberries give the cocktail a sweet, summer flavor. Depending on your taste, you can use a sweet rosé  wine for a sweeter drink or use a dry rosé wine  to balance the sweetness.

 

Ingredients and Substitutions

 

  • Rosé Wine: This recipe calls for a 750 ml bottle. However, you can simply double this recipe by using a large bottle of wine. Choose a rosé wine that you enjoy drinking. Keep in mind, the peaches and strawberries combined with sugar will add more sweetness to the peach sangria.
  • Peach Schnapps: If you do not have peach schnapps on hand, you could use peach vodka. The peach sangria will be less sweet if using vodka. Add more sugar to the drink if needed. You could also use peach juice. This will result in a peach sangria with less alcohol.
  • Peaches: Use canned peaches or frozen peaches if you cannot use fresh peaches. Canned peaches do not need to be mixed with sugar before adding to the pitcher.
  • Strawberries: Substitute raspberries or watermelon.
  • White Sugar
  • Sparkling Water: The sparkling water makes the peach sangria fizzy. You could substitute club soda, Sprite or ginger ale. Additionally, you could top the sangria with prosecco. This will add more alcohol content to the cocktail.

 

Peach Sangria Ingredients: Rosé Wine, Peach Schnapps, Peaches, Strawberries, Sugar and Sparkling Water

 

How to Make Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine

 

  1. Start with clean produce. Chop peaches and strawberries into bite size pieces.
  2. Add 2 chopped peaches and 1 cup chopped strawberries to a medium mixing bowl. Sprinkle fruit with granulated sugar. Gently stir in sugar to coat the fruit. Refrigerate for 30 minutes.
  3. Place the remaining 1 chopped peach and 1/2 cup chopped strawberries on medium size skewers. These fruit skewers will be used as cocktail garnishes.
  4. Add rosé wine, peach schnapps and sugar coated fruit to a large pitcher. Stir to combine.
  5. To serve, fill wine glasses half way with ice cubes. Pour peach sangria to cover ice cubes. Add chopped fruit from the pitcher to each glass. Top with sparkling water and garnish with a peach-strawberry skewer.

 

Expert Tips

 

  • Add the sparkling water right before serving and add directly to the glass that you are serving the sangria in. If you add the sparkling water to the pitcher and it sits, the water will go flat resulting in a sangria that tastes watered down and not fizzy.
  • Use a large bottle of wine (a 1.5 liter bottle) to double this recipe. This amount is perfect to quench a crowd’s thirst. Serve the peach sangria in a beverage dispenser or a punch bowl. This cocktail is perfect for a summer bridal shower or baby shower.
  • Add additional fruit! Everyone loves a fruity drink especially when it is hot outside. Add chopped mango, watermelon or raspberries for a fun summer treat!
  • Make sangria ice cubes! If you are serving this peach sangria outside, add some sangria to ice cube trays. Place in freezer. The ice cubes will not completely freeze due to the alcohol, however, they will firm up to become cubes. Use these as ice cubes and keep your peach sangria from becoming watered down.

 

peach sangria in glasses with peach strawberry garnish

FAQ

 

How do I store peach sangria? Sangria is best enjoyed within 24 hours of making. Store sangria covered and refrigerated. The sangria is still consumable after 24 hours, however, the fruit may become mushy.

Help! I don’t have rosé wine! If you do not have rosé wine, you can still make this peach sangria! Substitute your favorite white wine. I would recommend using a drier white wine such as sauvignon blanc or pinot grigio.

Can I make this peach sangria non-alcoholic? Yes! The best way to make this sangria non-alcoholic would be to use a white peach juice in place of the rosé wine and remove the peach schnapps from the recipe. You may need to add additional sugar to drink depending on your preferred sweetness level. You could also use a non-alcoholic rosé wine like this Surely Non-Alcoholic Sparkling Rose.

What is the best rosé wine to use in peach sangria? Use a dry rosé wine in sangria. The sugared fruit and the peach schnapps add extra sugar and sweetness to the cocktail. A dry rosé wine will keep the sangria from being too sweet.

What should I serve with this cocktail? Here are some fun, summer recipes to go with the peach sangria:

Easy Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Prosciutto

Cherry Tomato Toast with Whipped Ricotta 

Easy Watermelon Salsa with Mint and Kiwi

 

If you try this Simple Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine, be sure to leave a comment and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

Peach Sangria in glasses with peaches and strawberries
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Simple Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine

Peach Sangria with Rosé Wine is a fresh, light and simple cocktail. This drink captures the sweet flavors of summer and can be made for a crowd!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time35 minutes mins
Course: cocktail, Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 6
Calories: 170kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Large Pitcher
  • 1 Cutting Board
  • 1 Medium Bowl
  • Medium Wooden Skewers

Ingredients

  • 750 ml Bottle of Rosé wine
  • 1/2 cup Peach Schnapps
  • 3 Peaches
  • 1 1/2 cups Strawberries
  • 2 tbsp Granulated Sugar
  • Sparkling Water

Instructions

  • Slice 2 peaches and 1 cup of strawberries into bite size pieces. Place in a medium size bowl.
  • Sprinkle fruit with sugar and gently mix together to coat. Place fruit in refrigerator for 30 minutes.
  • Slice 1 peach and 1/2 cup strawberries into bite size pieces. Put fruit on medium sized skewers.
  • Add rosé, peach schnapps and sugar coated fruit to a large pitcher. Stir to combine.
  • To serve, pour sangria into wine glasses over ice. Top with sparkling water. Garnish with peach strawberry skewer.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 170kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 19mg | Potassium: 256mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 249IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Cocktails, Recipes, Spring Recipes

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake (with Cold Brew Coffee)

July 23, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 6 Comments

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake with whipped cream on top

This Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake uses cold brew coffee to make an easy coffee milkshake at home! With just 3 simple ingredients, make a delicious sweet and caffeinated treat! This DIY coffee milkshake will rival your favorite fast food milkshake and save you some money!

Craving another cold treat? Try this Watermelon Banana Smoothie! It uses just 5 pantry staples and will have you feeling refreshed in less than 5 minutes. Need caffeine in your cold treat? Try this delicious Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew or this Iced Matcha Chai Latte!

Coffee Milkshake with Cold Brew Coffee

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake Details

Level of Difficulty: Super simple! All that you have to do is measure, pour and blend!

Flavor: This Coffee Milkshake is a sweet treat! The ice cream gives a sweet vanilla flavor with coffee undertones. Depending on the flavor of the coffee beans, your shake will take on notes of the coffee.

Time: Less than 5 minutes! And this includes time to get all of the ingredients out!

What kind of coffee should I use?

For this Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake, I use Coffee Rendezbrew’s Rehoboth Beach Blend. This medium roast has cinnamon, praline and pecan flavors that pair perfectly with the butter pecan ice cream. It results in a sweet and nutty flavored milkshake. I recommend using a coffee flavor that you like.

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Butter Pecan Ice Cream– If you don’t have or don’t like Butter Cream Ice Cream, use an ice cream flavor that you like! Vanilla Bean, Coffee and Salted Caramel Ice Creams are all flavors that taste delicious when combined with ice cream.
  • Cold Brew Coffee– if you don’t have cold brew coffee on hand, you could use regularly brewed coffee. Be sure to cool the coffee in the refrigerator before adding to the blender so that it will not melt your ice cream!
  • Almond Milk– use whatever milk you have on hand. Keep in mind, the higher the fat content of the milk, the creamier the milkshake will be! You could also mix the milk with your favorite coffee creamer.
  • Cinnamon Sugar Roasted Pecans- this ingredient is optional because it is used for topping. It does give the coffee milkshake a little pizzazz. You can make your own at home or purchase them at specialty retailers like Cabelas or Harry & David’s. Regular pecans would work here as well!
  • Whipped Cream- this ingredient is also optional as it is used for a topping. If you are eating a milkshake, go ahead and add the whipped cream on top to make it really special!
  • Maple Syrup- another fun topping! While not necessary, the maple syrup highlights the pecan taste in the ice cream and the coffee.

Pouring Maple Syrup on top of Coffee Milkshake

How to make a Coffee Milkshake

  1. Start with cold brew coffee or regular coffee that has been brewed and refrigerated.
  2. Add coffee, milk and ice cream to blender.
  3. Blend until ingredients are incorporated and smooth.
  4. Pour into a tall, chilled glass.
  5. Top with whipped cream, maple syrup and cinnamon sugar pecans.
  6. Enjoy!

Expert Tips

  • Be sure to make your cold brew coffee ahead of time! If using regularly brewed coffee, give the coffee time to cool down in the refrigerator before adding to the blender.
  • Start with slightly softened ice cream. When ice cream is not frozen solid, it combines easier in a milkshake giving the milkshake a creamy consistency.
  • Choose a coffee flavor that you like! The coffee flavor comes through in this milkshake so you want to like the coffee that you are drinking!

Coffee Milkshake Add-Ins

The ingredients that you could add to this milkshake are endless. Here are some fun ideas:

  • Protein powder: vanilla protein powder would pair well with the butter pecan ice cream and keep you full all morning.
  • Banana
  • Peanut Butter
  • Make it an alcoholic milkshake! Try adding rum or whiskey for a fun, boozy milkshake!

FAQ

What kind of coffee do you use in this milkshake? Use a coffee that you like! It can be regular or decaf coffee. Just choose a flavor that you would regularly drink. A sweeter coffee will pair nicely with the butter pecan ice cream.

How do you make cold brew coffee? Making cold brew coffee is as simple as combining coffee grounds with room temperature water and allowing the coffee to steep. Steeping time depends on taste but it is recommended to steep overnight (around 12 hours). Here is a great tutorial to make cold brew coffee at home along with the perfect coffee to water ratio from my friend Meredith at Our Love Language is Food!

Help! I don’t want my milkshake to contain caffeine! Use decaf coffee instead of regular coffee to not get a coffee high! You can make cold brew decaf coffee at home!

My milkshake is too thick. What should I do? If your milkshake is too thick, add more cold brew coffee or milk. Keep in mind, cold brew coffee has higher levels of caffeine than regular coffee. If you do not want too much caffeine, add more milk or use a decaf coffee.

My milkshake is too thin. Help! Add more ice cream to thicken your milkshake!

Can you use coffee instead of milk in a milkshake? You can absolutely use coffee instead of milk in a milkshake! Using coffee gives your milkshake a warm roasted flavor, a hit of caffeine and makes a milkshake appropriate for breakfast!

Looking for more sweet treats?! Try one of these recipes!

Margarita Cheesecake Bites with a Homemade Graham Cracker Crust

Roll Out Butter Cookies

Sea Salt Chocolate Chip Cookie Pie

If you try this yummy Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake (with cold brew coffee) Recipe, please leave a comment or tag me on Instagram @delmarvaliciousdishes!

Coffee Milkshake with Pecans and Ice Cream
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake (with Cold Brew Coffee)

Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake uses cold brew coffee to make an easy coffee milkshake at home! With just 3 simple ingredients, make a delicious sweet and caffeinated treat!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast, Dessert, Drinks
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 419kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Blender
  • 1 Glass Chilled

Ingredients

  • 1 1/2 cups Butter Pecan Ice Cream Slightly Softened
  • 1/4 cup Cold Brew Coffee
  • 1/4-1/2 cup Almond Milk
  • Cinnamon Sugar Pecans, Whipped Cream, Maple Syrup for topping

Instructions

  • Add ice cream, cold brewed coffee and almond milk to a high speed blender.
  • Blend on high for 30 seconds until all ingredients are incorporated.
  • Pour into a tall, chilled glass and top with whipped cream and cinnamon sugar roasted pecans.
  • Enjoy!

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 419kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 87mg | Sodium: 241mg | Potassium: 423mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 42g | Vitamin A: 834IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 330mg | Iron: 0.2mg

Filed Under: Coffee, Dessert, Recipes, Summer Recipes

5 Ingredient Banana Watermelon Smoothie

July 14, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 7 Comments

5 Ingredient Watermelon Banana Smoothie with watermelon slices and strawberries- the perfect summer breakfast!

Watermelon Banana Smoothie is a light and healthy breakfast. Made with just 5 ingredients, this smoothie is quick and simple to make, refreshing and a nutritional powerhouse!

Looking for another easy breakfast for on the go mornings? Try this Toasted Coconut Granola! It is delicious in a homemade yogurt parfait or by itself for a quick and crunchy snack. You can prepare this Peach Baked Oatmeal (Without Bananas) ahead of time for an the go breakfast! For a sweet and caffeinated morning treat, try this Butter Pecan Coffee Milkshake (with Cold Brew Coffee) or this Maple Pecan Coffee with Cold Brew!

Watermelon Banana Smoothie in glasses ready to drink!

Watermelon Banana Smoothie Details

Level of Difficulty: Super Simple! This smoothie is about as easy a homemade breakfast comes. Add all ingredients to a blender, blend for a minute and your Watermelon Banana Smoothie is good to go!

Flavor: This smoothie has a fruity and sweet flavor. The banana flavor is very subtle. The watermelon and strawberries provide a natural sweetness.

Time: 5 minutes! This includes time to get all of your ingredients out, add to the blender and blend away!

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Banana
  • Seedless Watermelon
  • Strawberries- substitute your favorite tropical fruit if you do not have strawberries. Mango, Pineapples or Peaches would work great with this flavor combination.
  • Milk– use the milk that you have on hand! I tested this smoothie with coconut milk and almond milk. Both options were delicious. The coconut milk gave a slight nutty flavor to the smoothie. Cows milk is a good option in this smoothie. If milk is not your thing, substitute coconut water for an extra hydration boost.
  • Greek Yogurt– I use a Vanilla Greek yogurt for extra sweetness. I find that the flavored Greek yogurts remove the bitter taste of plain Greek yogurt. If you do not have Greek yogurt, you can substitute regular yogurt. However, the smoothie will not have as much protein as it would using Greek yogurt.

Watermelon Banana Smoothie Ingredients: Frozen watermelon, frozen banana, strawberries, greek yogurt, coconut milk

How to Make a Banana Watermelon Smoothie

  1. Start with frozen fruit. Freeze your banana and watermelon for at least 12 hours prior to making the smoothie.
  2. Add ingredients to blender. Blend ingredients on high for 1 minute. All fruit should be smooth and combined.
  3. Serve in glasses after blending. 

It really is as simple as those 3 steps. If you have an extra five minutes in the morning, be sure to try this smoothie!

Expert Tips

  • Use frozen fruit! By doing this, you will not have to add ice to your smoothie. Ice can water down a smoothie and take away the flavor. Once bananas begin to brown, wrap them in plastic wrap and freeze. I like to do this with any extra fruit I have that may go bad before it can be eaten.
  • Premeasure your fruit. Measure your fruit ahead of time and freeze in plastic bags. This will allow you to have all ingredients ready to put in the blender.
  • Leave your blender out. If you are trying to have a quick breakfast, have your blender and travel cup ready to go in the morning. Then, you can pull your frozen fruit out of the freezer and add everything right into the blender.

Watermelon Banana Smoothie in glasses looking fruity

Watermelon Banana Smoothie FAQ

What can I serve with my smoothie? This smoothie can be consumed alone on-the-go or serve this smoothie with a slice of avocado toast or a light quiche like this Whipped Ricotta Quiche!

What else can I add to my smoothie? If you want to add extra protein to your smoothie, a scoop of vanilla protein powder would be delicious with the fruity flavor combination. You can also add spinach for an extra nutrition punch. The spinach is relatively tasteless and will give the smoothie a bright green flavor. Additionally, you could top the smoothie with chia seeds or flax seeds. Finally, you can add oats to your blender. This will thicken your smoothie slightly and give it a grittier texture, however, the flavor will not be significantly altered.

Help! My smoothie is not sweet enough. If your smoothie is not sweet enough, try adding some honey or agave nectar. I like to use this Vanilla Greek Yogurt with Honey. It adds the perfect amount of natural sweetness.

What can I do with leftover smoothie? Use leftover Watermelon Banana Smoothie to make a delicious popsicle! Simply pour the leftover smoothie into a popsicle mold and freeze. This makes this smoothie even more toddler friendly! You can also make this smoothie baby friendly by putting the leftovers into a teething bag and freezing!

Is this Watermelon Banana Smoothie healthy? Yes, this Watermelon Banana Smoothie is healthy and full of health benefits! It is low in calories and high in nutrients. The watermelon will help you stay hydrated. The banana is full of potassium. Strawberries are low in calories and packed with vitamins. The Greek Yogurt gives the smoothie a protein punch to keep you full longer. Along with a healthy diet, this Watermelon Banana Smoothie could assist with weigh loss.

What fruit mixes well with watermelon? Banana mixes well with watermelon. Take this Watermelon Banana Smoothie as an example! The banana mixed with watermelon gives the watermelon smoothie a smooth texture and thickens the smoothie. Mango and peaches have similar properties to bananas and will bind well with watermelon.

Should I add the watermelon seeds to my smoothie? While watermelon seeds do have nutritional benefits, I do not recommend adding them to your smoothie. Once the seeds are blended, they will cause the smoothie to be chunky with seeds.

Looking for other easy watermelon recipes? Try these!

Easy Melon Caprese Skewers with Crispy Prosciutto

Watermelon Salsa with Kiwi and Mint

If you make this Watermelon Banana Smoothie, please leave a comment and share on Instagram @delmarvaliciousdishes! I hope you enjoy this smoothie as much as my family does!

Watermelon Banana Smoothie in glasses ready to drink!
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Watermelon Banana Smoothie

Watermelon Banana Smoothie is a light and healthy breakfast. Made with milk, Greek yogurt and strawberries, this smoothie is a nutritional powerhouse!
 
Cook Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: American
Servings: 1
Calories: 411kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Blender
  • Measuring Cups

Ingredients

  • 1 cup Seedless Watermelon Chunks Frozen
  • 1 Banana Frozen
  • 1/2 cup Strawberries Fresh or Frozen
  • 1 cup Milk
  • 1/2 cup Vanilla Greek Yogurt

Instructions

  • Freeze watermelon and banana at least 12 hours before using.
  • Add all ingredients to a blender. Blend on high for 1 minute.
  • Serve immediately in glass.

Nutrition

Serving: 1g | Calories: 411kcal | Carbohydrates: 70g | Protein: 20g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 130mg | Potassium: 1.171mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 53g | Vitamin A: 1.344IU | Vitamin C: 65mg | Calcium: 329mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Breakfast, Recipes, Spring Recipes, Summer Recipes

Pineapple Baked Beans (Using Black Beans)

July 7, 2022 by Lynne Kenton Leave a Comment

Pineapple Baked Beans in a bowl with corn bread and pan of baked beans

Pineapple Baked Beans are made using black beans and traditional canned baked beans. This easy, sweet and spicy dish will fly off the table at your next barbeque!

Need another barbeque side dish? Try this Herby Lemon Orzo Salad with Roasted Vegetables! It is full of fresh summer vegetables and feeds a crowd!

Have some extra black beans? Use them in this Smokey Mexican Bean Dip! Full of flavor, this dip is like eating the insides of a taco on a chip!

Pineapple Baked Beans in small bowl with corn bread and pineapple chinks

Pineapple Baked Bean Details

Pineapple Baked Beans are a fresh take on a traditional summer side dish, baked beans! This recipe uses pineapple to sweeten, bourbon to intensify the flavor and red onion and bell pepper to bulk up the dish.

Level of Difficulty: Easy! As long as you can cook some bacon, you will be able to make these Pineapple Baked Beans! This side dish requires chopping, cooking the bacon, sautéing the onion and pepper and combining all ingredients. After this is done, you bake until the dish is hot and bubbly!

Time: The dish requires 20 minutes of prep work and 45 minutes of bake time. The prep work includes chopping and cooking the bacon, onion and pepper.

Flavor: These Pineapple Baked Beans have a sweet flavor thanks to the maple flavor of the canned baked beans and the natural sweetness of the pineapple. The grainy mustard has a bitter flavor that perfectly contrasts with the sweetness. The bourbon intensifies the flavor and gives a smooth aftertaste.

Ingredients and Substitutions

  • Baked Beans- I like to use Bush’s Vegetarian Baked Beans. Choose a brand that you like.
  • Black Beans- If you don’t like black beans, use another can of baked beans (the smaller size) or a bean that your family enjoys.
  • Red Onion- You could use a white onion in place.
  • Bell Pepper- I like to use a yellow pepper in this dish as the color pops with the pineapple. Use whatever bell pepper you have on hand.
  • Barbeque Sauce- Use a brand that your family likes! The beans really take hold of the barbeque flavor so use a tasty one.
  • Bourbon- This ingredient is optional. The bourbon really does add more flavor to the beans. If you choose to omit the bourbon, use extra barbeque sauce so that the beans are not dry.
  • Bacon- I like to use thick cut bacon. The saltiness of the bacon is a good contrast to the sweet beans.
  • Pineapple Chunks- Use canned or fresh pineapple cut into small bite size pieces. I like to purchase the small kid sized containers as they are already chopped into small pieces.
  • Grainy Mustard- Substitute regular mustard.
  • Black Pepper
  • Chili Powder- Use less chili powder for a less spicy side dish.

Pineapple Baked Bean Ingredients: Baked Beans, Black Beans, Mustard, Pineapple, Bourbon, Bacon, Onion, Pepper, Barbeque Sauce, Black Pepper and Chili Powder

How To Make Pineapple Baked Beans

Pineapple Baked Beans come together in a few, simple steps!

  1. Cook Bacon. Heat a sauté pan on medium high heat. Chop bacon up into small bite size pieces. Add bacon to pan and cook until bacon is firm but not crispy about 7 minutes. Let bacon cool on a paper towel lined plate. Drain all fat from pan except for a tablespoon.
  2. Cook Bell Pepper and Red Onion. Add bell pepper and red onion to the same pan that bacon was cooked in with reserved fat. Cook on medium heat for about 5 minutes until vegetables become soft.
  3. Combine Ingredients. Add all ingredients to a large mixing bowl. Stir to combine. Transfer pineapple baked bean mixture to a 9×13 pan.
  4. Cook Pineapple Baked Beans. Bake beans at 350 degrees for 45 minutes until beans are bubbly. Allow beans to cool before serving. The beans will solidify as they cool.

Pan of Pineapple Baked Beans

FAQ

Are pineapple baked beans a vegetable? Pineapple Baked Beans are not a vegetable although this baked bean recipe does contain vegetables. Beans are in the plant food family known as legumes.

What kind of beans are baked beans? The beans used in baked beans are kidney beans. This recipe includes both kidney beans and black beans.

What can I do with leftover baked beans? Leftover baked beans can be eaten hot or cold. Add the baked beans to a quesadilla with cheese. Another option is to top toast with them for an easy English-like breakfast. You could also add them to a baked potato for a meat-free meal.

Can I cook my baked beans in the slow cooker? Yes, you can cook baked beans in the slow cooker! If you don’t want to turn on your oven, the crock pot is the perfect way to cook your baked beans. Simply follow all instructions until the baking step. Place pineapple baked beans in a slow cooker and set heat to low for 6-7 hours. After the cook time, remove the lid and stir the beans. Allow beans to slightly cool before serving.

Help! My Pineapple Baked Beans look watery. Do not worry if your baked beans appear watery when you pull them from the oven. As the beans cool, they will thicken. If they look really watery (as in all the beans are surrounded by liquid), allow the beans to bake for 5-10 more minutes for the liquid to absorb.

What to serve with Pineapple Baked Beans? Pineapple Baked Beans are a delicious barbeque side dish. They pair perfectly with hamburgers and hot dogs. Try the baked beans as a side with these Grilled Beer Brats!

If you try this recipe, please leave a comment below and tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram! I hope your family and friends love this recipe as much as mine do!

Pan of Pineapple Baked Beans
Print Recipe

Pineapple Baked Beans (using Black Beans)

Pineapple Baked Beans are made using black beans and traditional canned baked beans. This easy, sweet and spicy dish will fly off the table at your next barbeque!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 286kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Ingredients

  • 6 Bacon Slices
  • 1 Bell Pepper Chopped
  • 1 Red Onion Chopped
  • 28 oz Baked Beans
  • 14 oz Black Beans Drained & Rinsed
  • 1 cup Barbeque Sauce
  • 1/3 cup Bourbon Optional
  • 1 cup Pineapple Chunks
  • 1 1/2 tbsp Grainy Mustard
  • 1 tsp Chili Powder
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Chop bacon into small pieces and cook on stove at medium for 8-10 minutes until cooked but not crispy. Let cool on a paper towel lined plate.
  • Drain all fat except for a tablespoon. Cook onion and bell pepper for 5 minutes until soft.
  • Mix together baked beans, black beans, chopped bacon, green pepper, red onion, barbeque sauce, bourbon, pineapple chunks, mustard, chili powder and pepper.
  • Cook for 45 minutes until bubbly.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 286kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 7mg | Sodium: 976mg | Potassium: 663mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 640IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 3mg

Filed Under: Fall Recipes, Recipes, Side Dishes, Summer Recipes

Browned Butter S’mores Treats

June 30, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 7 Comments

Browned Butter S'mores Treats on a tray with extra chocolate and marshmallows

Browned Butter S’mores Treats are an easy no-bake summer treat! These treat bars are made with golden graham cereal and have all the flavor of s’mores without the campfire!

No-bake desserts are the way to go during hot summer months. Check out these Margarita Cheesecake Bites with a Homemade Cracker Crust for another no-bake dessert option!

Browned Butter S'mores Treats sliced with marshmallows and chocolate bar on the side

What are Browned Butter S’mores Treats?

Browned Butter S’mores Treats are similar to a rice krispy treat. They are made with golden graham cereal, marshmallows, chocolate chips and a hint of vanilla. These ingredients combine to make a quick and fun treat bar that is similar to traditional s’mores without the open flame and campfire.

Browned Butter S’mores Treats Details

Level of Difficulty: Easy! These treat bars require melting butter on the stove and combining the ingredients. The most difficult part is waiting for the treat bars to cool and firm up before indulging.

Time: 10 minutes is all it takes to make these treat bars. I suggest waiting an hour before slicing to allow them cool.

Flavor: Sweet! The marshmallow, vanilla and chocolate give these bars a sweet flavor. The golden graham cereal give a cinnamon and honey flavor.

Close up shot of s'mores treats to show the crispy texture

Ingredients

These s’mores treats require just a few pantry staples!

  • Cooking Spray or Butter
  • Unsalted Butter
  • Marshmallows- use mini marshmallows or large marshmallows. I have found that the mini marshmallows are easier to melt and stir with the cereal.
  • Vanilla Extract
  • Golden Grahams Cereal- feel free to use a generic brand.
  • Chocolate Chips- for a traditional campfire treat, use milk chocolate. You can also use your favorite chocolate chip or chop up your favorite candy bar. I like to use Hershey’s Milk Chocolate Candy Bars. 

How to Make Browned Butter S’mores Treats

Brown the butter. Heat a large pot over medium heat and add butter. Allow butter to melt stirring occasionally. Once butter is melted, continuously stir. You want to continuously stir to prevent the butter from burning. The butter will become foamy. Stir until butter is brown and has a nutty aroma.

Mix ingredients. Add the marshmallows to the butter and stir until the marshmallows are melted and mixed with the butter. Remove the pot from heat and stir in the vanilla. Add the golden grahams cereal. Stir to combine marshmallow mixture with cereal. Add in the chocolate chips. Stir to mix with other ingredients. The chocolate will begin to melt while mixing. This is okay. This makes the s’mores treats taste just like a campfire treat!

Add to pan. Use either a 9×13 or 8×8 pan. If using the 9×13 pan, the treat bars will be skinnier. If using the 8×8 pan, the treat bars will be tall. I find it easier to distribute the mixture in a 9×13 pan. Spray pan with cooking spray or line the pan with parchment paper. Place the cereal mixture in the pan. Use parchment paper on your hands to press the cereal down into the pan and distribute the mixture evenly. Allow the mixture to cool and the marshmallows to harden before slicing. Use a sharp knife to slice.

FAQ

What does s’more mean? S’more is slang for give me some more! These smore’s treats will certainly have you saying ‘s’more!’

Help! I don’t have marshmallows. Can I still make s’mores treats? Yes, you can still make s’mores treats without marshmallows. In place of the marshmallows, use marshmallow crème or marshmallow fluff. You could also melt leftover Peeps in place of traditional marshmallows. Be careful, the color of the peep will combine with the chocolate so it may not be visually appetizing.

What is a good substitute for golden grahams cereal in these s’mores treats? In place of the cereal, you could chop up traditional graham crackers into cereal size pieces. You could also use Rice or Corn Chex. If using Chex, I would suggest adding some cinnamon and sugar to the mix to get a sweeter taste. This option has not been tested.

What is the difference between s’mores treats and actual s’mores? S’mores Treats are made inside over the kitchen stove. They are served as a handheld treat with all of the s’mores ingredients combined. Actual s’mores are made outside over a campfire. A large marshmallow and chocolate piece are sandwiched between graham crackers to make a yummy campfire treat!

Expert Tips

  • Don’t let the butter burn while browning! This is very easy to do if you do not continuously stir the butter. The butter will become foamy and bubble. Continue to stir until brown and while all ingredients are mixed together.
  • Use a piece of parchment paper to press cereal into pan. The melted marshmallows in these S’mores Treats make them very, very sticky. If you try to use your hands, you will have a big mess. Press down on a piece of parchment paper to distribute the cereal mixture evenly into your pan.

S'mores Treats stacked on top of each other. A yummy pile of treats!

As always, if you make this recipe, please comment, leave a review and share on Instagram @delmarvaliciousdishes!

Browned Butter S'mores Treats sliced with marshmallows and chocolate bar on the side
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Browned Butter S'mores Treats

Browned Butter S'mores Treats are an easy no-bake summer treat! These treat bars are made with golden graham cereal and have all the flavor of s'mores without the campfire!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8
Calories: 414kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Large Pot
  • 1 Spatula
  • 1 9x13 or 8x8 pan
  • Parchment Paper

Ingredients

  • 8 oz Unsalted Butter
  • 6 cups Golden Grahams Cereal
  • 1/2 cup Milk or Dark Chocolate Chips
  • 1 tsp Vanilla
  • 1 cup Mini Marshmallows
  • Cooking Spray

Instructions

  • Spray 9x13 pan with cooking spray or line with parchment paper.
  • Add butter to a large pot. Turn heat to medium to melt butter. Once butter is melted, stir continously. Butter will become foamy. Stir until butter is brown and smells nutty.
  • Add marshmallow to butter. Stir marshmallows to melt. Remove from heat.
  • Add vanilla and stir to combine.
  • Add cereal. Stir until all cereal is covered with marhsmallow mix.
  • Add chocolate chips and stir to combine. The chocolate chips will melt while stirring.
  • Add mixture to a 9x13 pan. Use a piece of parchment paper to press down on cereal mixture to evenly distribute throughout pan.
  • Allow cereal to completely cool before slicing.

Nutrition

Serving: 8g | Calories: 414kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 62mg | Sodium: 162mg | Potassium: 165mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1.216IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 116mg | Iron: 5mg

Filed Under: Dessert, Recipes

Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas

June 23, 2022 by Lynne Kenton 4 Comments

Tray of Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas topped with avocados and cilantro

Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas are an easy, kid friendly and make ahead dinner! Cook the chicken and vegetable filling in the crockpot then stuff into tortillas and bake in the oven for a quick dinner that feeds a crowd!

 

Looking for another crockpot dinner? Try this Sweet and Spicy Venison Chili!

Need more of a Mexican fix?! Try this Smokey Mexican Bean Dip! It is like eating the insides of a taco with chips and dip!

 

 

 

Chicken and Vegetable Enchilada Details

Level of Difficulty: Easy! The chicken and vegetables cook in the crock pot. Once cooked through, shred the chicken, mix the chicken filling together, stuff into the tortillas and bake! There are a few steps to make these chicken and vegetable enchiladas but the recipe feeds a crowd and freezes well!

Flavor: These chicken enchiladas have a traditional Mexican flavor. The enchiladas are mild in spice. You can make less spicy by using diced tomatoes without green chilies.

Time: The chicken and vegetables take 4-6 hours in the crockpot to cook. Don’t worry! This time is hands off. After the chicken and vegetables are cooked, there is 20 minutes of mixing and assembling and 30 minutes to bake.

 

Ingredients

Below are the ingredients required to make these yummy and homemade Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas. I have included some suggested substitutions. Please note, the substitutions have not been tested and are suggestions.

  • Chicken Breast– I use boneless and skinless chicken breast in this recipe. This allows to shred the chicken quickly and easily. You could use chicken thighs or bone in chicken breast here.
  • Chicken Broth– If you are in a pinch, you can substitute water for the broth.
  • Yellow Onion– You can substitute a red onion.
  • Red and Orange Pepper– Use whatever colored peppers you have on hand!
  • Seasonings: Salt, Pepper, Cumin, Oregano, Garlic Powder- you could add a little cayenne pepper for heat or simply use taco seasoning.
  • Flour Tortillas– Corn tortillas are a great (and healthier) option.
  • Enchilada Sauce– To make this a quick and easy dinner, I use canned red enchilada sauce. When I have time, I do like to make my own enchilada sauce. Check out this recipe by Love Bakes Good Cakes for an easy and delicious sauce!
  • Shredded Cheddar Cheese– Use your favorite shredded cheese here. Mozzarella works great for melting. Taco cheese will add a little more zest.
  • Diced Tomatoes with Green Chilies– You could use fresh, chopped tomatoes here. If worried about the spice level, do not use a can with the green chiles.
  • Greek Yogurt– Sour Cream is a great substitute.

 

Chicken Enchilada Ingredients: Peppers, Tortilla, Chicken Breasts, Enchilada Sauce, Spices, Diced Tomatoes, Greek yogurt, Cheese, Chicken broth and Onion

 

How to Make Chicken Enchiladas

  1. Cook chicken and vegetables in crockpot. Add chicken broth, chicken breasts, onion, peppers and seasonings (salt, pepper, garlic powder, cumin and oregano) to a large crockpot. Cook on low 6-8 hours or on high 3-4 hours until chicken is cooked and vegetables are soft.
  2. Make chicken filling. Shred chicken and add to a large mixing bowl with the peppers and onions. Add the diced tomatoes and Greek yogurt. Mix to combine.
  3. Assemble the enchiladas. Pour a 1/2 a cup enchilada sauce on the bottom of a 9×13 pan. There should be enough to thinly cover the bottom of the pan.  Stuff 1/4 cup chicken filling into flour tortillas. Lay stuffed tortilla seam side down in pan. Continue until the pan is filled. Pour enchilada sauce on top just to cover (about 1/2 cup). Sprinkle with cheddar cheese. Cover with tin foil.
  4. Bake enchiladas. Bake at 350 degrees for 20 minutes. Remove foil and bake for 10 more minutes until cheese is melted. Allow enchiladas to rest 10 minutes before serving.

 

Chicken, Seasonings, Red Pepper, Yellow Pepper and Onion in Crockpot

Shredded Enchilada Chicken, Peppers and Onions in a Mixing Bowl

FAQ

What side dishes should I serve with Chicken Enchiladas? Serve these chicken and vegetables enchiladas with rice, black beans or a side salad. This is a filling meal in itself!

What else can I put in Chicken Enchiladas? If you want to add more to the chicken enchilada filling, you could add beans for extra protein. You could use all vegetables to make them vegetarian or you could use extra cheese to make the ultimate cheesy enchiladas!

What toppings can I put on Chicken Enchiladas? Avocado, cilantro, jalapenos or queso fresco cheese are fun and easy toppings for Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas.

Why do I cover my Chicken Enchiladas while baking? Cover your enchiladas while baking to allow the base to cook without the cheese melting and burning. Once everything is warm and cooked together (after about 20 minutes), remove the foil to allow the cheese to melt.

Can I freeze my Chicken Enchiladas? Yes, you can freeze these Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas! Follow the instructions and stop before putting the shredded cheese on top. Freeze enchilada tray. When ready to cook, remove from freezer and thaw. Sprinkle cheddar cheese on top and bake according to recipe directions.

How can I shred my chicken? You can shred the chicken in a large mixing bowl using two forks. A quick and easy method to shred chicken is to put in a stand mixer while the chicken is still warm and mix on low until chicken is shredded.

What should I do with leftover chicken filling? If you have leftover chicken filling (which you may have depending on how much filling was used in the tortillas), I suggest making another pan of enchiladas and freezing! These are the perfect weeknight meal prep. They are also perfect to bring to a new mom or someone in need of a cooked dinner.

Are Chicken and Vegetables healthy? In my opinion, these Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas are healthy! They contain vegetables and lean protein. Greek yogurt is used to keep the chicken filling moist and creamy and there is no sour cream used. Plus, a homemade meal is always better than a restaurant option. As always, eat in moderation for a healthy diet.

What oven temperature and cooking time should I use? Cook enchiladas at 350 degrees for 30 minutes with foil on top. Remove the foil during the last 10 minutes of cooking to allow for the cheesy to melt.

 

Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas on Plate with limes and side of sour cream

 

If you make these delicious Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas in the crockpot love them, leave a comment or tag @delmarvaliciousdishes on Instagram!

 

Tray of Chicken Enchiladas Topped with Avocado and Cilantro
Print Recipe
5 from 3 votes

Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas

Crockpot Chicken and Vegetable Enchiladas are an easy, kid friendly and make ahead dinner! Cook the chicken and vegetable filling in the crockpot then stuff into tortillas and bake for a quick dinner that feeds a crowd!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time4 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Total Time4 hours hrs 35 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Mexican
Servings: 6
Calories: 206kcal
Author: Lynne Kenton

Equipment

  • 1 Crock Pot
  • 1 Mixing Bowl
  • 1 9 x 13 Pan

Ingredients

  • 1/4 cup Chicken Broth
  • 1-1.5 lbs Chicken Breast
  • 1 Yellow Onion Sliced
  • 1 Red Bell Pepper Sliced
  • 1 Yellow Bell Pepper Sliced
  • 1 tsp Salt
  • 1/2 tsp Black Pepper
  • 1/2 tsp Cumin
  • 1/2 tsp Oregano
  • 1 tsp Garlic Powder
  • Flour Tortillas
  • 1 cup Enchilada Sauce Store bought or Homemade
  • 1 cup Shredded Cheddar Cheese
  • 10 oz Diced Tomatoes with Green Chiles Drained
  • 1/2 cup Whole Milk Greek Yogurt

Instructions

  • Pour chicken broth into crock pot.
  • Add chicken, onion, red and yellow pepper to a large crock pot.
  • Season with salt, pepper, cumin, garlic powder and oregano.
  • Cook on high 2-4 hours or on low 6-8 hours until chicken is cooked through.
  • Remove chicken from crock pot and shred.
  • Add crock pot mixture to a large mixing bowl. Add diced tomatoes and Greek yogurt. Stir together.
  • Pour about 1/2 cup of enchilada sauce into the bottom of a 9x13 pan. It should be just enough sauce to thinly cover the entire pan.
  • Add chicken filling to tortillas. Place tortillas seam side down in 9x13 pan. Continue until pan is filled. If you have leftover chicken filling, use to make additional enchiladas in a new pan.
  • Pour 1/2 cup enchilada sauce on top of tortillas. Sprinkle with shredded cheddar cheese. Cover with foil.
  • Bake for 20 minutes. After 20 minutes, remove foil and bake for 10 more minutes until cheese is melted and bubbly.
  • Allow enchiladas to rest for 10 minutes before slicing. Top with sliced avocado, cilantro or jalapeno slices before serving.

Nutrition

Serving: 6g | Calories: 206kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 21g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 1.88mg | Potassium: 523mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1.184IU | Vitamin C: 68mg | Calcium: 188mg | Iron: 1mg

Filed Under: Main Course, Recipes

  • « Previous Page
  • 1
  • 2
  • 3
  • Next Page »